[go: up one dir, main page]

TW201118476A - VA type liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

VA type liquid crystal display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201118476A
TW201118476A TW98140800A TW98140800A TW201118476A TW 201118476 A TW201118476 A TW 201118476A TW 98140800 A TW98140800 A TW 98140800A TW 98140800 A TW98140800 A TW 98140800A TW 201118476 A TW201118476 A TW 201118476A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
film
liquid crystal
phase difference
display device
rth
Prior art date
Application number
TW98140800A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI486688B (en
Inventor
Makoto Ishiguro
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Priority to TW098140800A priority Critical patent/TWI486688B/en
Publication of TW201118476A publication Critical patent/TW201118476A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI486688B publication Critical patent/TWI486688B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to a VA type liquid crystal display device, in which the said VA type liquid crystal display device comprises fornt side polarizer (14), rear side polarizer (12), VA type liquid crystal cell (LC) disposed between the above-mentioned front side polarizer and rear side polarizer, and first phase difference area (16) consisting of one or more than two layers of phase diffecence layer between the above-mentioned rear side polarizer and the above-mentioned VA type liquid crystal cell. The said first phase difference area satisfies the following formulas: 0 nm ≤ Re(590) ≤ 10 nm, and |Rth(590)| ≤ 25 nm In the formulas, Re(λ) indicates in-plane retardation value (nm) in the wave of λ nm; and Rth(λ) indicates retardation value (nm) of thickness direction in the wave of λ nm.

Description

201118476 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明係關於正面對比受到改善之 VA(Vertically Aligned)型液晶顯示裝置。 【先前技術】 近年來,液晶顯示裝置的高對比(CR)化正不斷進步 著。特別是,與其他的模式相比較,V A型液晶顯示裝置係 有在法線方向的CR(以下,稱爲「正面CR」)較高的優點, 且各種用以更改善其優點的硏究開發正不斷進行著。其結 果’在6年間,VA型液晶顯示裝置的正面CR係從4〇0 左右到8000左右提高了約20倍。 另一方面,關於液晶顯示裝置,不僅正面CR高,而 且在斜向方向的CR(以下,有稱爲「視野角CR」之情形) 也高是很重要。關於VA型液晶顯示裝置,已有各種提案 採用相位差薄膜作爲減輕於黑顯示時的斜向方向所產生之 光漏的技術(例如,特開2006- 184640號公報)。一般而 言,液晶胞作爲中心,在前側與後側分別配置相位差薄膜, 且使2片的相位差薄膜分別分擔光學補償上必要的相位 差,以達成光學補償。在光學補償的組合方面通常使用2 種方式。其中之一的方式係在前側及後側分別配置的相位 差薄膜上平均地分擔相位差的方式,具有所使用的薄膜能 只有一種的優點。另一種的方式係在單側所配置之相位差 薄膜上分擔更大的相位差的方式,從可與便宜的薄膜組合 且可以光學補償而言,在成本上是有利的》於後者的方式 -4 - 201118476 上’使在後側所配置之相位差薄膜分擔更大的相位差者係 實用上爲一般的。其理由之1係在於製造成本。關於這個 理由’係在特開2006-241293號公報的[0265]欄中,有 「僅在一側偏光板的(液晶胞與偏光膜之間的)保護膜上使 用本發明的醯化纖維素系薄膜之情形,其係可爲上側偏光 板(觀察側)、下側偏光板(背光側)的任一側,功能上沒有任 何問題。但是,由於作爲上側偏光板使用時係有在觀察側 (上側)設置功能性膜之必要性,而有生產率下降的可能 性’所以一般認爲做爲下側偏光板使用之情形比較高,且 認爲是較佳的實施形態」的記載。第2個理由係在後側配 置具有較大相位差之薄膜者,係在耐衝撃性、溫度變化及 濕度變化等的耐環境性之觀點方面而言爲佳。 迄今,沒有任何針對爲了改善像這樣的視野角對比所 利用之相位差薄膜(相位差膜)的光學特性、與正面CR之關 係的檢討。 【發明內容】 在高CR化的液晶顯示裝置方面,基於迄今降低CR的 主要原因所提案的手法上,要達成更進一層的高對比化係 爲困難。本發明者經專心一意檢討的結果,可知在VA型 液晶顯示裝置的情況下,以往不認爲會對正面C R造成影 響而存在於後側偏光子與液晶胞之間的相位差層的遲滯 値,係爲使正面CR下降的原因之一。 本發明係以提供一種正面對比高的VA型液晶顯示裝 置爲課題。 201118476 解決前述課題用的手段係如下所述。 [1] —種VA型液晶顯示裝置,其特徵在於具有前側 偏光子、後側偏光子、於前述前側偏光子與後側偏光子之 間所配置的VA型液晶胞、及在前述後側偏光子與前述VA 型液晶胞之間由1層或2層以上的相位差層所構成之第1 相位差領域,該第1相位差領域滿足下述式: Ο n m ^ R e (5 9 0 ) ^ 10nm,且 |Rth(590)| ^ 2 5 n m 式中,Re (λ)係意味著在波長 λ nm的面内遲滯値 (nm),Rth(;l)係意味著在波長ληιτι的厚度方向的遲滯値 (n m)。 [2] 如[1丨的VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前述VA型液 晶胞係具有前側基板及後側基板’且前述前側基板的構件 對比(CRf)的比(CRf/CRr)對前述後側基板的構件對比(CRr) 爲3以上。 [3] 如[1]或[2]的VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中在前述前 側偏光子與前述VA型液晶胞之間具有由1層或2層以上 的相位差層所構成之第2相位差領域,且該第2相位差領 域係滿足下述式: 3 0 n m ^ Re (5 9 0) ^ 90nm,且 1 7 0 n m = Rth (5 9 Ο) ^ 3 Ο Ο n m 〇 [4] 如[3]的VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第1及前 述第2相位差領域係滿足下述式:BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a VA (Vertically Aligned) liquid crystal display device in which front contrast is improved. [Prior Art] In recent years, high contrast (CR) of liquid crystal display devices is progressing. In particular, compared with other modes, the VA liquid crystal display device has the advantage of high CR in the normal direction (hereinafter referred to as "front CR"), and various developments to further improve its advantages. It is continuing. As a result, in the past six years, the front CR of the VA liquid crystal display device has been increased by about 20 times from about 4 〇 to about 8,000. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device, it is important that the front surface CR is high and the CR in the oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as "viewing angle CR") is high. Various proposals have been made for a VA type liquid crystal display device. A retardation film is used as a technique for reducing light leakage caused by an oblique direction in black display (for example, JP-A-2006-184640). In general, the liquid crystal cell is centered, and a retardation film is disposed on the front side and the rear side, respectively, and the two phase retardation films share the phase difference necessary for optical compensation to achieve optical compensation. Two methods are generally used in the combination of optical compensation. One of the methods is to share the phase difference evenly on the retardation film disposed on the front side and the rear side, and there is only one advantage in that the film to be used can be used. Another way is to share a larger phase difference on the phase difference film disposed on one side, which is advantageous in terms of cost from the combination with an inexpensive film and optical compensation. 4 - 201118476 The above is the practical use of the phase difference film arranged on the rear side to share a larger phase difference. The reason for this is the manufacturing cost. In the column [0265] of JP-A-2006-241293, "the cellulose of the present invention is used only on the protective film of the one side polarizing plate (between the liquid crystal cell and the polarizing film). In the case of a film, it may be either one of the upper polarizing plate (observation side) and the lower polarizing plate (backlight side), and there is no problem in function. However, since it is used as the upper polarizing plate, it is on the observation side. (The upper side) is necessary for providing a functional film, and there is a possibility that the productivity is lowered. Therefore, it is generally considered that the case where the lower polarizing plate is used is relatively high, and it is considered to be a preferred embodiment. The second reason is that a film having a large phase difference is disposed on the rear side, and it is preferable from the viewpoint of environmental resistance such as impact resistance, temperature change, and humidity change. Heretofore, there has been no review of the optical characteristics of the retardation film (retardation film) used for improving the viewing angle comparison as described above and the relationship with the front CR. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In the case of a liquid crystal display device having a high CR, it is difficult to achieve a higher level of contrast based on the method proposed for reducing the CR factor. As a result of the intensive review, the present inventors have found that in the case of the VA liquid crystal display device, the retardation of the retardation layer existing between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell is not considered to affect the front surface CR. It is one of the reasons for the decrease in the frontal CR. The present invention has been made in an effort to provide a VA type liquid crystal display device having a high front contrast. 201118476 The means for solving the above problems are as follows. [1] A VA liquid crystal display device comprising a front side polarizer, a rear side polarizer, a VA type liquid crystal cell disposed between the front side polarizer and a rear side polarizer, and a polarized light on the rear side The first phase difference region composed of one or two or more retardation layers between the VA type liquid crystal cell and the first phase difference region satisfies the following formula: Ο nm ^ R e (5 9 0 ) ^ 10nm, and |Rth(590)| ^ 2 5 nm where Re (λ) means the in-plane hysteresis nm(nm) at the wavelength λ nm, and Rth(;l) means the thickness at the wavelength ληιτι The delay of the direction 値 (nm). [2] [1] VA type liquid crystal display device in which the VA type liquid crystal cell system has a front substrate and a rear substrate] and a ratio (CRf) of the front substrate (CRf) is opposite to the rear side The component contrast (CRr) of the substrate is 3 or more. [3] The VA liquid crystal display device according to [1] or [2], wherein the front side polarizer and the VA type liquid crystal cell have a second phase composed of one or two or more retardation layers. The difference domain, and the second phase difference domain satisfies the following formula: 3 0 nm ^ Re (5 9 0) ^ 90 nm, and 1 70 nm = Rth (5 9 Ο) ^ 3 Ο Ο nm 〇 [4] In the VA liquid crystal display device of [3], the first and second phase difference regions satisfy the following formula:

And(590)-70 ^ R t h ι ( 5 9 0 ) + R t h 2 ( 5 9 Ο ) ^ Δηά(590)- 1 Ο 201118476 式中,d係前述VA型液晶胞的液晶層的厚度(nm) ’ △η( λ)係前述VA型液晶胞的液晶層在波長;I的折射率異 方向性,AndU)係意味著AnU}與d的積;RthiU)係 意味著在波長儿的前述第1相位差領域之厚度方向的遲滯 値(nm),及Rth2( λ )係意味著在波長;I的前述第2相位 差領域之厚度方向的遲滯値(n m)。 [5] 如[1]~[4]中任一項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中 前述第1相位差領域係由醯化纖維素系薄膜所構成、或含 有醯化纖維素系薄膜。 [6] 如[5]的VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前述醯化纖維 素系薄膜係在滿足下述式(I)及(II)的範圍內,含有至少一種 使厚度方向的遲滯値Rth降低的化合物, (I) (Rth[A]-Rth[0])/A 各-1.0 (II) 0.0 1 ^ A ^ 30 (Rth[A]:含有A%的使Rth降低之化合物的薄膜之 Rth(nm) ’ Rth[0]:不含有使Rth降低之化合物的薄膜之 Rth(nm)’及A:薄膜原料聚合物的質量當作10〇時的化 .合物的質量(%))。 [7] 如[5]或[6]的VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前述醯化 纖維素系薄膜係在醯基取代度爲2·85~3.00的醯化纖維素 中’相對於醯化纖維素固體含量而言含有0.0^30質量。/。 的至少1種使面内遲滯値Re及厚度方向遲滯値Rth降低 的化合物。 [8] 如[5】~[7]中任一項之Va型液晶顯示裝置,其中 201118476 前述醯化纖維素系薄膜係相對於醯化纖維素固體含量而 言’含有 0·01~30質量。/。的至少 1種使薄膜的 |Re(400}-Re(7〇〇)| 及 |Rth(400)-Rth(700)| 降低的化合 物。 [9]如[1卜[8】中任一項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中 前述第1相位差領域係由丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜所構成、或 含有丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜。 [1〇]如[9]的VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前述第i相 位差領域係由含有含至少1種從內酯環單位、馬來酸酐單 位、及戊二酸酐單位所選出之單位的丙烯酸系聚合物之丙 烯酸系聚合物薄膜所構成、或具有該丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜。 [11]如[3]〜[10]中任一項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其 中前述第2相位差領域係由醯化纖維素系薄膜所構成、或 含有醯化纖維素系薄膜。 [12】如[3]~[10]中任一項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其 中前述第2相位差領域係由環狀烯烴系聚合物薄膜所構 成、或含有環狀烯烴系聚合物薄膜。 [1 3 ]如[1卜[1 2 ]中任一項之V A型液晶顯示裝置,其 中正面對比爲1500以上。 [I4]如[1]~[13]中任一項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其 係含有依序發光獨立之3原色光的背光單元,且以場序制 (Field Sequential)驅動方式而驅動的。 發明之效果 根據本發明的話,能夠提供一種正面對比高的VA型 201118476 液晶顯示裝置。 【實施方式】 實施發明之形態 以下,針對本發明來詳細説明。另外,在本說明書中 使用「~」所表示的數値範圍,係意味著包含「~」的前後 所記載之數値以作爲下限値及上限値的範圍》 首先,就本說明書中所使用的用語加以説明。 (遲滯値、Re及Rth) 在本說明書中,ReU)及Rth(;l)係各自表示在波長λ 的面内遲滯値(nm)及厚度方向的遲滯値(nm)。Re(;l)係在 KOBRA 21ADH或W R (王子計測機器(股)製)中,使波長 λ nm的光向薄膜法線方向入射而測定的。KOBRA的標準 波長爲590nm。 所測定之薄膜等的試樣在以1軸或2軸的折射率橢圓 體所表示的情形中,係依照以下的方法來算出Rth( λ )。And(590)-70 ^ R th ι ( 5 9 0 ) + R th 2 ( 5 9 Ο ) ^ Δηά(590)- 1 Ο 201118476 where d is the thickness of the liquid crystal layer of the aforementioned VA type liquid crystal cell (nm ) Δη( λ) is the wavelength of the liquid crystal layer of the VA type liquid crystal cell; the refractive index anisotropy of I; AndU) means the product of AnU} and d; RthiU) means the aforementioned The hysteresis nm (nm) in the thickness direction of the phase difference region and Rth2 ( λ ) mean the hysteresis nm (nm) in the thickness direction of the second phase difference region of the wavelength; I. [5] The VA liquid crystal display device according to any one of [1] to [4] wherein the first phase difference field is composed of a deuterated cellulose film or a deuterated cellulose film. [6] The VA liquid crystal display device according to [5], wherein the deuterated cellulose-based film contains at least one type of hysteresis 値Rth in the thickness direction within a range satisfying the following formulas (I) and (II) Compound, (I) (Rth[A]-Rth[0])/A each -1.0 (II) 0.0 1 ^ A ^ 30 (Rth[A]: Rth of a film containing A% of a compound which lowers Rth (nm) 'Rth[0]: Rth(nm)' of the film of the compound which lowers Rth and A: the mass (%) of the compound when the mass of the film raw material polymer is 10 。. [7] The VA type liquid crystal display device of [5] or [6], wherein the deuterated cellulose-based film is in a deuterated cellulose having a thiol substitution degree of 2.85 to 3.00 relative to the deuterated fiber. The solid content contains 0.0^30 mass. /. At least one compound which reduces the in-plane retardation 値Re and the retardation in the thickness direction 値Rth. [8] The Va type liquid crystal display device according to any one of [5] to [7], wherein the aforementioned deuterated cellulose-based film has a mass of 0·01 to 30 with respect to the solid content of the deuterated cellulose. . /. At least one compound which lowers |Re(400}-Re(7〇〇)| and |Rth(400)-Rth(700)| of the film. [9] As in [1] [8] In the VA liquid crystal display device, the first phase difference region is composed of an acrylic polymer film or an acrylic polymer film. [1] The VA liquid crystal display device according to [9], wherein the first The i phase difference field is composed of an acrylic polymer film containing at least one acrylic polymer having a unit selected from a lactone ring unit, a maleic anhydride unit, and a glutaric anhydride unit, or has the acrylic system. The VA type liquid crystal display device according to any one of [3] to [10] wherein the second phase difference field is composed of a deuterated cellulose film or contains deuterated cellulose. [12] The VA liquid crystal display device according to any one of [3], wherein the second phase difference region is composed of a cyclic olefin polymer film or a cyclic olefin system. [1] The VA type liquid crystal display device of any one of [1, [1, 2], wherein the front contrast is 150 [I4] The VA type liquid crystal display device according to any one of [1] to [13], which is a backlight unit that sequentially emits light of three primary colors independently, and is driven by a Field Sequential. According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a VA type 201118476 liquid crystal display device having a high front contrast. [Embodiment] The present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the present invention. The range of numbers indicated by "~" means the range of the number 値 before and after the "~" is used as the range of the lower limit 値 and the upper limit 》. First, the terms used in this specification are explained.値, Re, and Rth) In the present specification, ReU) and Rth(;l) each indicate an in-plane hysteresis nm (nm) of the wavelength λ and a hysteresis 値 (nm) in the thickness direction. Re(;l) is measured by injecting light having a wavelength of λ nm into the normal direction of the film in KOBRA 21ADH or W R (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments Co., Ltd.). The standard wavelength of KOBRA is 590 nm. In the case where the sample such as the film to be measured is represented by a refractive index ellipsoid of one axis or two axes, Rth(λ) is calculated by the following method.

RthU )係前述ReU )對於面内的遲相軸(根據KOBRA 21ADH或WR而判斷的)當作傾斜軸(旋轉軸)(無遲相軸的 情形係以薄膜面内的任意方向爲旋轉軸)的薄膜法線方 向,從法線方向至單側5 0度以1 0度間距,自各該傾斜之 方向使波長λ nm的光入射且全部共測定6點,並按照其 所測定之遲滯値與平均折射率的假設値及所輸.入之膜厚値 來算出 KOBRA 21ADH 或 WR。 在上述中,將來自法線方向之面内遲相軸當作旋轉 軸,且具有在某傾斜角度中遲滯値之値爲零的方向之薄膜 201118476 的情形中,將傾斜角度比該傾斜角度大的遲滯値變更其符 號爲負之後,算出KOBRA 21ADH或WR» 此外,遲相軸當作傾斜軸(旋轉軸)(無遲相軸之情形係 以薄膜面内的任意方向當作旋轉軸)且從任意傾斜的2方 向測定遲滯値,並按照該値與平均折射率的假設値及所輸 入之膜厚値,根據以下的式(X)及式(XI)亦可算出Rth。 式(X) • ny X n2 dRthU) is the above-mentioned ReU) as the tilt axis (rotation axis) for the in-plane slow axis (determined according to KOBRA 21ADH or WR) (the case where there is no slow phase axis is the rotation axis in any direction in the film plane) The normal direction of the film, from the normal direction to a single side of 50 degrees at a pitch of 10 degrees, from the direction of each of the tilts, the light of the wavelength λ nm is incident and all of the total measurement is 6 points, and according to the measured hysteresis The assumption of the average refractive index and the film thickness of the input film are calculated to calculate KOBRA 21ADH or WR. In the above, in the case of the film 201118476 in which the in-plane slow axis from the normal direction is regarded as the rotation axis and the direction of the hysteresis 某 is zero in a certain inclination angle, the inclination angle is larger than the inclination angle. After the hysteresis is changed, the sign is negative, and the KOBRA 21ADH or WR» is calculated. In addition, the slow axis is regarded as the tilt axis (rotation axis) (in the case where there is no slow phase axis, it is regarded as the rotation axis in any direction in the film plane) and The hysteresis 测定 is measured from the two directions of the arbitrary inclination, and according to the assumption of the 値 and the average refractive index and the input film thickness 値, Rth can also be calculated from the following formula (X) and formula (XI). Formula (X) • ny X n2 d

Lysin(sin -ΐ(ϋί1^2) + (nz cos(sin ))2 cos {sin J)) *\( nx nx nx 式(X I )Lysin(sin -ΐ(ϋί1^2) + (nz cos(sin ))2 cos {sin J)) *\( nx nx nx (X I )

Rth = { (nx + ny) /2 — nz} Xd 附註= 上述的R e ( 0 )係表示從法線方向在傾斜角度Θ之方向 的遲滯値。另外,式中,nx係表示在面内的遲相軸方向的 折射率,ny係表示在面内中正交於nx方向的折射率,nz .係表示正交於nx及ny方向的折射率。d係表示膜厚》 在所測定之薄膜無法以1軸或2軸的折射率橢圓體來 表現者 '無所謂的光學軸(optic axis)之薄膜的情形中,係 依照以下的方法來算出RthU)。Rth = { (nx + ny) /2 — nz} Xd Note = The above R e ( 0 ) indicates the hysteresis 値 from the normal direction in the direction of the tilt angle Θ. Further, in the formula, nx represents a refractive index in the in-plane axis direction, ny represents a refractive index orthogonal to the nx direction in the plane, and nz represents a refractive index orthogonal to the nx and ny directions. . d is a film thickness. In the case where the film to be measured cannot be represented by a one-axis or two-axis refractive index ellipsoid, a film having no optical axis (optic axis) is calculated by the following method. .

Rth(;l )係前述Re(A )對於面内的遲相軸(根據KOBRA 2 1AD Η或WR而判斷的)當作傾斜軸(旋轉軸)之薄膜法線方 向’從-50度至+50度以10度間距,自各該傾斜之方向使 波長λ nm的光入射且測定1 1點,按照其測定之遲滯値與 平均折射率的假設値及所輸入之膜厚値,算出 KOBRA -10- .201118476 21ADH 或 WR。 上述的測定中,平均折射率的假設値係可使用聚合物 手冊(JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC)、各種光學薄膜的目錄 値。關於平均折射率之値爲未知者,可用阿貝折射計進行 測定。主要的光學薄膜的平均折射率之値係例示如下: 醯化纖維素(1.48)、環烯烴聚合物(1.52)、聚碳酸酯 (1.59)、聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯(1.49)、聚苯乙烯(1.59)。 藉由輸入此等平均折射率的假設値與膜厚,以KOBRA 21ADH或WR算出nx、ny、nz。依照該算出之nx、ny、 nz 以進一步算出 Nz = (nx-nz)/(nx-ny)。 本說明書中,相位差薄膜等的「遲相軸」係意味著折 射率爲最大的方向。另外,所謂的「可見光區域」係指 380nm~780nm。另外,在本說明書,針對測定波長沒有 特別附註的情形,測定波長爲590nm。波長590nm係在 本發明所屬之技術領域的業界中,爲薄膜物性値的管理上 一般所使用的波長。 另外,本說明書中,關於相位差領域、相位差薄膜及 液晶層等的表示各構件的光學特性之數値、數値範圍、及 定性的表現(例如,「同等」、「相等」等的表現),係視爲解 釋成表示對於液晶顯示裝置與於其中所使用的構件包含一 般所容許的誤差之數値、數値範圍及性質。 本說明書中,所謂的相位差薄膜係意味著在液晶胞與 偏光子之間所配置之具有自己支持性的膜(與遲滯値的大 小無關)。另外,相位差膜係與相位差薄膜同義。相位差領 [S } -11- 201118476 域係在液晶胞與偏光子之間所配置之1層或2層以上的相 位差薄膜的總稱。 另外,在本說明書,所謂的「前側」係意味著顯示面 側,所謂的「後側」係意味著背光側。另外,在本說明書 所謂的「正面」係意味著對顯示面之法線方向,「正面對比 (CR)」係意旨從在顯示面之法線方向中所測定的白亮度及 黑亮度所算出的對比。 本發明係關於一種VA型液晶顯示裝置,其特徵係在 VA型液晶胞與後側偏光子之間具有滿足下述式之第1相 位差領域。Rth(;l) is the above-mentioned Re(A) for the in-plane retardation axis (determined according to KOBRA 2 1AD Η or WR) as the film normal direction of the tilt axis (rotation axis) 'from -50 degrees to + At 50 degrees, the light of the wavelength λ nm is incident from the direction of the inclination at 10 degrees, and the point 1 is measured. According to the hysteresis 値 and the average refractive index of the measured 値 and the input film thickness 値, the KOBRA -10 is calculated. - .201118476 21ADH or WR. In the above measurement, the assumption of the average refractive index is the use of a polymer manual (JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC), a catalogue of various optical films. The enthalpy of the average refractive index is unknown, and can be measured by an Abbe refractometer. The enthalpy of the average refractive index of the main optical films is as follows: deuterated cellulose (1.48), cycloolefin polymer (1.52), polycarbonate (1.59), polymethyl methacrylate (1.49), polystyrene (1.59). Nx, ny, and nz are calculated by KOBRA 21ADH or WR by inputting the assumption of the average refractive index and the film thickness. Further, Nz = (nx - nz) / (nx - ny) is calculated based on the calculated nx, ny, and nz. In the present specification, the "late phase axis" of a retardation film or the like means a direction in which the refractive index is the largest. Further, the term "visible light region" means 380 nm to 780 nm. Further, in the present specification, the measurement wavelength is 590 nm in the case where there is no special note on the measurement wavelength. The wavelength of 590 nm is a wavelength generally used in the management of the physical properties of the film in the art to which the present invention pertains. In the present specification, the phase difference, the retardation film, the liquid crystal layer, and the like indicate the number, the number range, and the qualitative performance (for example, "equivalent", "equal", etc.) of the optical characteristics of each member. It is to be construed as indicating that the liquid crystal display device and the components used therein contain a numerical range, a number range, and a property which are generally acceptable. In the present specification, the term "relativity film" means a self-supporting film disposed between a liquid crystal cell and a polarizer (regardless of the size of the hysteresis )). Further, the retardation film is synonymous with the retardation film. Phase difference [S } -11- 201118476 The term is a general term for a phase difference film of one or more layers disposed between a liquid crystal cell and a polarizer. In addition, in this specification, the "front side" means the display surface side, and the "back side" means the backlight side. In addition, the "front side" in this specification means the normal direction of the display surface, and the "front contrast (CR)" is calculated from the white brightness and the black brightness measured in the normal direction of the display surface. Compared. The present invention relates to a VA liquid crystal display device characterized in that it has a field of a first phase difference satisfying the following formula between a VA type liquid crystal cell and a rear side polarizer.

Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 10nm,且 |Rth(590)| ^ 25nm 迄今,液晶顯示裝置的光源係使用照射具有指向性的 光之背光以作爲配置於後側之背光。來自該背光斜向入射 於液晶顯示裝置的光係在液晶胞中的液晶層及彩色濾光片 被散射了,且於正面方向散射的成分係成爲使正面CR降 低的原因之一。本發明者檢討的結果係得到直至來自背光 入射於後側偏光子的光入射至液晶胞爲止,通過相位差領 域時正面C R的降低係變得顯著的知見。該理由係如下所 述。 (i)來自背光斜向入射並通過後側偏光子之直線偏光 係在入射至液晶胞之前,當通過相位差領域時,因相位差 領域的Re及/或Rth而被楕圓偏光化了,然後因液晶胞中 的液晶層及彩色濾光片層等而被散射成正面。被散射成正 面的光之中,前側偏光子之吸收軸方向的成分(以下,有稱 -12- 201118476 爲「A成分」的情形)雖然在偏光子被吸收’但是前側偏光 子之透過軸方向的成分(以下,有稱爲「B成分」的情形) 則通過了偏光子。該B成分係成爲降低正面CR的原因。 若減少B成分的話,可使得正面對比提昇。根據該觀點’ 配置於後側偏光子與液晶胞之間的相位差領域的Rth係越 小越好。 另外, (ϋ)在構成相位差領域之相位差薄膜中’製造上有光 軸的分布,其係在與偏光子貼合之際產生了軸偏移。由於 軸偏移促進來自背光的光的楕圓偏光化,所以如果減輕軸 偏移的話,可使得正面對比提昇。在該觀點的情形下,配 置於後側偏光子與液晶胞之間的相位差領域的R e係越小 越好。 基於上述(i)及(ii)的知見,進一步檢討的結果發現經由 使後側偏光子與液晶胞之間的第1相位差領域滿足下述 式’可得到高正面C R的VA型液晶顯示裝置,而達到完成 了本發明。Onm ^ Re (590) ^ 10 nm, and |Rth(590)| ^ 25 nm Heretofore, the light source of the liquid crystal display device uses a backlight that illuminates light having directivity as a backlight disposed on the rear side. The light from the liquid crystal display device obliquely incident on the liquid crystal display device is scattered in the liquid crystal cell and the color filter in the liquid crystal cell, and the component scattered in the front direction is one of the causes of lowering the front surface CR. As a result of the review by the inventors, it is found that the light from the backlight incident on the rear side polarizer enters the liquid crystal cell, and the decrease in the front surface CR in the phase difference region becomes remarkable. The reason is as follows. (i) The linearly polarized light from the backlight obliquely incident and passing through the back side polarizer is polarized by the Re and/or Rth in the phase difference field before passing through the phase difference field before entering the liquid crystal cell. Then, it is scattered to the front side due to the liquid crystal layer, the color filter layer, and the like in the liquid crystal cell. Among the light scattered in the front side, the component in the absorption axis direction of the front side polarizer (hereinafter, the case where -12-201118476 is "A component") is absorbed in the polarizer but the transmission axis direction of the front side polarizer The component (hereinafter, referred to as "B component") passes through a polarizer. This B component is responsible for reducing the front CR. If the B component is reduced, the front contrast can be improved. According to this point of view, the smaller the Rth system in the phase difference region between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, the better. Further, (ϋ) in the retardation film constituting the phase difference region, the distribution of the optical axis is produced, and the axial shift occurs when it is bonded to the polarizer. Since the axis offset promotes the circular polarization of the light from the backlight, the front contrast can be improved if the axis offset is reduced. In the case of this viewpoint, the smaller the R e system in the field of the phase difference between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, the better. Based on the above findings (i) and (ii), it was found that a VA type liquid crystal display device having a high front CR can be obtained by satisfying the following formula 'in the first phase difference region between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell. And achieved the completion of the present invention.

Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 10nm,且 |Rth(590)| ^ 25nm 亦即’根據本發明的話,藉由形成上述構成,可提供 達成高的正面對比之VA型液晶顯示裝置。另外,在本發 明’由於在後側偏光子與液晶胞之間的相位差領域中僅配 置了适Re及低Rth的相位差薄膜,所以雖然偏光子會因 來自背光的熱而進行變形等且對該相位差薄膜增加應力, 但是原來低Re及低Rth之相位差薄膜的光學異方向性的Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 10 nm, and |Rth(590)| ^ 25 nm, that is, according to the present invention, by forming the above configuration, a VA type liquid crystal display device which achieves high frontal contrast can be provided. Further, in the present invention, since only a phase difference film having a suitable Re and a low Rth is disposed in the phase difference between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, the polarizer is deformed by heat from the backlight, and the like. Adding stress to the retardation film, but the optical anisotropy of the phase difference film of low Re and low Rth

ί S -13- 201118476 變化並沒有達到極限。其結果在迄今VA型液晶顯示裝置 中被觀察到的、於畫面的四角部位所產生的光漏、稱爲所 謂的使角落不均(corner mura)之顯示品位降低的故障亦 可減輕。 再者,在前側偏光子與液晶胞之間的第2相位差領域 爲顯示規定的光學特性之態樣,係可提供能達成提昇斜向 方向的CR及減輕黑顯示時的色偏移(color shift)之液晶 顯示裝置。 圖1中顯示本發明的VA型液晶顯示裝置之一例的剖 面模式圖。另外,圖中,各層厚度之相對關係未必與實際 的液晶顯示裝置之各層厚度的相對關係一致。 圖1所示之VA型液晶顯示裝置係具有VA型液晶胞 LC、以及夾著它的後側偏光板PL1及前側偏光板PL2。在 後側偏光板PL 1的更外側配置有背光1 0,且其係使來自背 光1 〇的光以依照後側偏光板PL 1、液晶胞LC、及前側偏 光板PL2的順序入射的方式而構成。液晶胞LC爲VA模 式的液晶胞,在黑顯示時成爲垂直配向。液晶胞LC係藉 由使由玻璃等所構成之上側基板26與下側基板.24成對向 而構成的,在前述基板上具有配向膜(沒有圖示)與電極層 (沒有圖示),進而在前側的基板上具有彩色濾光片層(沒有 圖示)。 後側偏光板PL1係分別具有偏光子12、與其表面的第 1相位差薄膜1 6及外側保護薄膜20,以及前側偏光板PL2 係分別具有偏光子14、與在其表面的第2相位差薄膜18 -14- 201118476 及外側保護薄膜22。偏光子12及14係配置成其吸收軸 成爲互相正交的方向。在後側偏光板PL1的偏光子12與 液晶胞LC之間所配置的第1相位差薄膜係爲滿足〇nm S Re(590) ^ 10nm,且 |Rth(590)| ^ 25nm 的相位差薄 膜》在滿足該特性的範圍,亦可存在複數片的相位差薄膜。 例如,在第1相位差薄膜1 6與偏光子1 2之間,亦可另外 配置偏光子12的保護薄膜,惟第1相位差薄膜16與該保 護薄膜合計的相位差要滿足〇nm S Re(590) S l〇nm’ 且I Rth(590)丨S 25nm。亦即,在偏光子 12與液晶胞 LC之間亦可存在有複數片的相位差薄膜,惟複數片合計的 相位差要滿足上述特性。藉由使配置於偏光子12與液晶胞 LC之間的相位差薄膜滿足上述特性,在圖1所示之VA型 液晶顯示裝置能抑制來自背光1 〇的斜向入射光於入射至 液晶胞LC之前的楕圓偏光化。其結果可減輕因上述⑴及(ii) 的理由所引起的對比降低,且可達成高的正面CR。 本發明者專心一意檢討的結果,本發明的效果已知在 VA型液晶胞的前側基板(包含圖1中基板26與形成於基板 上的所有構件)的構件對比C Rf那一方高於後側基板(包含 圖1中基板2 4與形成於基板上的所有構件)的構件對比 (C Rr)之態樣中,變得特別地顯著。再者,前側基板的構件 對比CRf對後側基板的構件對比(CRr)之比(CRf/CRr)爲3 以上,亦即在可知3 S CRf/CRr的態樣中,本發明的效 果變得顯著。此處’當VA型液晶胞(圖1中的LC)在2片 的基板(圖1中的基板24及26)中分解時,前側的基板(圖 [S ] -15- 201118476 1中基板26)與形成於其基板上之構件的總稱稱爲前側基 板’後側的基板(圖1中基板24)與形成於其基板上之構件 的總稱稱爲後側基板。該構件的例中,包含彩色濾光片、 黑底、陣列構件(TFT陣列等)、基板上的突起部、共通電 極、狹縫等、各種的構件。亦即,所謂液晶胞的後側基板 及前側基板的構件對比係指在各基板與形成於各基板上之 各種構件之全部對比。關於測定方法的詳細內容,係在後 述之實施例有記載。 本發明者專心一意檢討的結果已知後側偏光子與液晶 胞之間的第1相位差領域之遲滯値,會對於液晶顯示裝置 的正面CR造成很大的影響。該理由係由於液晶胞在各構 件(例如,液晶層、彩色濾光片、黑底、陣列構件、於基板 所形成之突起部、共通電極構件、狹縫構件等)中,會產生 所謂的散射與繞射之光學現象,且對於彼等光學現象有偏 光依存性。以下,詳細地説明。 一般而言,由於VA型液晶顯示裝置在黑顯示時,液 晶層會成爲垂直配向狀態,所以通過後側偏光子且朝法線 方向前進的直線偏光之後即使通過液晶層,其偏光狀態也 沒有變化,原則上全部在前側偏光子的吸收軸被吸收了。 亦即,可以說原則上在黑顯示時於法線方向沒有光漏。然 而,VA型液晶顯示裝置在黑顯示時的正面透過率不爲零》 其理由之1係由於液晶層中的液晶分子會搖晃,且已知入 射於液晶層的光會因某程度的搖晃而被散射了。入射於液 晶層的光係越完全地不含有僅被前側偏光子的吸收軸所吸 -16- 201118476 收之直線偏光成分的話,其影響變得越大,且正面的光漏 有變多的傾向。亦即,配置於後側之相位差領域的相位差 越大’且越變換成高楕圓偏光率的楕圓偏光的話,越能減 輕因其搖晃所引起的正面光漏。 然而,本發明者檢討的結果已知除了在液晶層中的液 晶分子的搖晃以外,在後側偏光子與液晶層之間的相位差 領域之相位差亦爲其原因之一。來自背光之指向性的某光 通過後側偏光子,自斜向方向入射於該相位差領域時,由 於其相位差而使直線偏光變換成楕圓偏光。該楕圓偏光係 藉由液晶胞中的陣列構件、及彩色濾光片層而被繞射及散 射,且至少一部份成爲前進於正面方向的光。由於該楕圓 偏光含有無法爲前側偏光子之吸收軸所截斷的直線偏光成 分,所以即使在黑顯示時也成爲於正面方向漏光、正面CR 降低的原因。經由通過該陣列構件與彩色濾光片層所產生 的光學現象係例如在陣列構件與彩色濾光片層的表面不是 完全平滑的,有某程度的凹凸、或在該構件中含有散射因 子等。經由通過該陣列構件與彩色濾光片層所產生的光學 現象對於正面方向之光漏所造成的影響’大於因前述之液 晶層中的液晶分子搖晃所引起的影響。 再者,本發明者專心一意檢討的結果已知藉由通過相 位差領域而成爲楕圓偏光的光在通過液晶胞中的規定構件 之際所受到的光學現象(繞射及散射等)’係爲光在入射至 液晶層之前通過該構件、或在通過液晶層之後通過該構 件,且影響正面方向之光漏的態樣變得不同。在圖1中, -17- 201118476 例如如圖2(a)所示,在後側基板24的内面配置有陣列構 件,且在前側基板26的内面配置有彩色濾光片時,光就會 在入射至液晶層之前通過陣列構件,且會在通過液晶層之 後通過彩色濾光片。 在光入射至液晶層之前所通過的構件(例如陣列構 件),入射光的楕圓偏光率係由通過其之前的後側相位差領 域(第1相位差領域)的相位差來決定。另一方面,在入射 至液晶層之後所通過的構件(例如彩色濾光片),除了由後 側相位差領域的相位差來決定,亦由液晶層的相位差來決 定。此處,VA用液晶顯示裝置的情形,通常將液晶層的 △ nd(590)(d係液晶層的厚度(nm)、Δη(λ )係液晶層在波長 λ的折射率異方向性,AndU )係Δη(λ )與d的積)設定在 2 80 ~ 3 50nm左右。亦可設定後側相位差領域的相位差以 使得陣列構件的光漏變少,則通過液晶時楕圓率相反地變 大。由於後側相位差領域的相位差越大則入射偏光的楕圓 率變得越小,所以根據於通過液晶層之前光入射的構件、 或通過液晶層之後光入射的構件而設定降低後側相位差領 域的相位差,其結果逆轉了該構件影響正面方向的光漏之 作用。 後側相位差領域之相位差的高低、經由通過各構件而 對正面方向光.漏造成影響的傾向、及其影響的強弱係整理 於圖2(b)中。另外,圖2(b)中,「t」係表示後側相位差 領域與高遲滯値的情形相比,能提高正面CR的作用,「I . 係表示使正面CR降低的作用。箭號的根數係爲其作用強 ‘201118476 弱的基準,根數越多的話表示作用越強。 如圖2(b)所示,在前側基板配置彩色濾光片、及在後 側基板配置陣列構件之VA型液晶顯示裝置的態樣,降低 後側相位差領域的相位差時,由配置於後側基板之陣列構 件所引起的光學現象係使產生之正面方向的光漏朝減輕的 方向作用,另一方面,由配置於前側基板之彩色濾光片層 所引起的光學現象係使產生之正面方向的光漏朝增加之方 向作用,亦即雙方的作用有抵銷的關係。 例如,在後側基板與前側基板雙方同樣地配置有成爲 使對比降低之主要原因的構件而成的液晶胞,係後側的第 1相位差領域爲低的遲滯値,且也會因爲由配置於後側基 板之構件(例如在圖2(b)爲陣列構件)而提高正面CR之作 用、或由配置於前側基板之構件(例如在圖2 (b)爲C F構件) 而降低正面C R之作用,而有若干消除的情形。亦即,所 謂後側的第1相位差領域爲低遲滯値之本發明的特徴,係 指在後側基板存在有很多成爲使對比降低之主要原因的構 件之態樣中,顯示出特別高的效果。 另外,後側之第1相位差領域的遲滯値給予正面CR 的影響係在低正面CR的液晶顯示裝置中,爲大致上可忽 略的程度。然而,針對近年來所提供的高正面CR(例如, 正面CR爲1500以上)的液晶顯示裝置,在圖謀進一步改 善正面CR上’則無法忽略該影響。本發明係針對正面CR 爲1500以上的液晶顯示裝置,進一步改善正面CR上特別 有用。 •19- 201118476 另外,在圖2係圖示在前側基板26之内面有彩色濾 光片(CF.)、在後側基板24之内面有陣列構件的一般液晶胞 構成來做爲一例,且在本發明的液晶顯示裝置中,CF及陣 列構件的位置爲任意的。例如,如直接將彩色濾光片配置 於陣列上(COA,color filter on array)般,CF配置於具 有陣列構件之後側基板側上的態樣當然也包含於本發明。 另外,陣列構件若爲配置於前側基板2 6側的話,陣列構件 的作用係變得與圖2(b)中的CF構件相同,又若CF爲配置 於後側基板24側的話,CF構件的作用係變得與圖2(b)的 陣列構件相同。關於未圖示的其他構件(例如,黑底)也是 一樣的,構件若爲配置於前側基板2 6側的話,該陣列構件 的作用係變得與圖2(b)中的CF構件相同,又構件若爲配 置於後側基板24側的話,該構件的作用係變得與圖2(b) 的陣列構件相同。 如上述所述,已知在前側基板(圖1中基板26)的構件 對比CRf對後側基板(圖1中基板24)的構件對比(CRr)之比 (CRf/CRr)爲3以上、亦即滿足3 S CRf/CRr之態樣,本 發明的效果係變得顯著。作爲滿足該關係之液晶胞之例 子,有例如後側基板爲CO A基板之液晶胞。關於CO A, 係在特開2005-99499號公報及特開2005-258004號公 報中有詳細的記載。 另外’如前述所述,雖然因在CF、黑底、陣列構件中 的光學現象所致的在黑顯示時的光漏之入射偏光狀態依存 性係全部顯示相同的傾向,但是由於黑底的貢獻相對的 -20- 201118476 小,所以將c F配置於具有陣列構件之後側基板側而成的 COA在液晶顯示裝置的黑底位置係可在液晶胞内的任何一 處,較佳係位於後側偏光子與液晶層之間。 另外,滿足3 S CRf/CRr之液晶胞之例子方面,可 舉例如不具有彩色濾光片之液晶胞、及不具有彩色濾光片 之場序制驅動的液晶胞。關於場序制驅動的液晶胞,係在 特開2009-42446號公報、特開2 0 0 7 - 3 2 2 9 8 8號公報、 及特許第 3996178號公報等中有詳細的記載,可加以參 照。所謂的場序制驅動係利用使獨立之3原色光依序發光 的背光單元。具備LED之背光單元作爲光源爲佳,例如較 佳係利用具備發光紅、綠、藍3色的LED元件作爲光源之 背光單元。 另外,亦可爲於後側基板上配置陣列構件、於前側基 板上配置彩色濾光片之一般態樣的液晶胞,若爲彩色濾光 片之對比高的態樣的話,當然爲滿足上述條件 3 $ CRf/CRr之本發明的較佳態樣。作爲高對比的彩色濾光片 之例子,與迄今在CF上所使用之顏料相比較,可舉例如 使用更微小粒徑之顏料而成的彩色濾光片。作爲使用顏料 之高對比的彩色濾光片之製作方法之例子,可舉出以下的 2種方法。 (I) 使用稱爲砂磨機與輥磨機、球磨機之分散機,機 械性地更微細地粉碎顏料粒子之方法,例如在特開 2009-144126號公報等中有詳細的記載,可加以參照。 (II) 藉由使顏料溶解於溶劑中之後再析出,以調整微 -21- 201118476 細的顏料粒子之方法,例如在特開2009- 134 1 78號公報 中有詳細的記載。 另外,顏料以外,亦提案有利用染料以製作高對比的 彩色濾光片之方法。在特開2005-173532號公報中有詳 細的記載,可加以參照。 藉由利用此等經高對比化之彩色濾光片,即使是一般 的構成亦可成爲滿足3各 CRf/CRr的液晶胞。 又在圖1中,前側偏光板PL2具有之第2相位差薄膜 1 8的光學特性較佳係有助於改善斜向方向的對比、及減輕 黑顯示時的色偏移者。另外,VA型液晶胞LC的液晶層之 And(;l)係如上所述,一般而言在280~350nm左右。第2 相位差薄膜1 8的遲滯値、特別是Rth的較佳範圍係可依 照液晶層之Δη(1( λ )的値而變動。爲了改善斜向對比,關 於對Δη^;1)之較佳相位差薄膜的組合,係在各種的公報 中有記載,例如在特許3282986號、第3666666號及第 3556159號等中有記載,可加以參照。 關於第2相位差領域之光學特性的較佳範圍係如後 述。 另外,VA型液晶胞的Δηά(590)—般係在280~350nm 左右,其係爲了儘可能提高白顯示時的透過率。另一方面, △ nd(590)爲280nm以下之情形,雖然伴隨著^11(1(590)的 降低,白亮度會稍微地降低,但由於晶胞的厚度d變小, 所以成爲高速應答性優異的液晶顯示裝置。後側的第1相 位差領域若爲低遲滯値的話,朝正面方向的光漏變少之結 •22- 201118476 果得到所謂的高正面c R之本發明的特徴’係即使在任何 的Δη(1(590)的液晶顯示裝置中也有效果。 在圖1的VA型液晶顯示裝置係顯示第1相位差薄膜 16及第2相位差薄膜18分別作爲偏光子12及14的保護 薄膜也具有功能之實施形態,惟本發明係不限定於本實施 形態。例如,在第1相位差薄膜及第2相位差薄膜分別與 偏光子12及14之間,亦可用其他方法配置偏光子的保護 薄膜。但是,如上所述,配置於第1相位差薄膜與偏光子 12之間的保護薄膜係作爲與第1相位差薄膜之積層體的全 部,必須滿足在第1相位差領域所求得之特性。 另外,後側偏光子1 2係在其背光1 0側的表面上具有 保護薄膜20,且亦可進而在其表面上具有防污性薄膜、抗 反射薄膜、抗眩光薄膜、抗靜電薄膜等的功能性薄膜,另 外,同樣地,前側偏光子1 4係在其顯示面側表面上具有保 護薄膜22,且亦可進而在其表面上具有防污性薄膜、抗反 射薄膜、抗眩光薄膜、抗靜電薄膜等的功能性薄膜。 可是’如前所述,在單側分擔較大相位差以進行光學 補償之方式的情形中,較大相位差的薄膜迄今一般係配置 於後側’惟如本發明般配置於前側者一般係認爲可提昇作 爲偏光板的產率。說明其理由。 較大相位差的薄膜由於必須有用高倍率進行延伸之步 驟’所以與即使薄膜中不添加很多的添加劑也可以製造的 便宜薄膜(所謂的平面TAC = Re爲0〜10nm、Rth爲 30~80nm之三乙醯纖維素薄膜等)相比、或與較小相位差 -23- 201118476 的薄膜相比,寬幅化係爲困難。在一般的液晶顯示裝置中 係使用橫向的液晶胞,一般係將前側偏光子的吸收軸配置 成水平方向(左右方向)、將後側偏光子的吸收軸配置成鉛 直方向(上下方向)。再者,在工業的生產上,一般係用捲 進捲出(roll to roll)方式來貼合偏光子與相位差薄膜。考 慮到將該製法中所製作之偏光板與液晶胞貼合時,於前側 配置較大相位差的薄膜的那一方,可以較高的效率使用偏 光板的寬度方向、亦即可提高產率。如本發明般在後側配 置相位差小的相位差薄膜之情形,該薄膜做成爲寬幅薄膜 的製作係爲容易,藉由與寬幅偏光子組合,可進一步提高 產率。其結果可減少廢棄之偏光板的量。 此處,用具體的數字來加以説明。一般而言,相位差 薄膜的寬度係大部分爲 1100mm、1300mm、1500mm、 2000mm、2500mm >薄膜的厚度係大部分爲 25/zm、 40// m、80# m。捲繞薄膜之軋輥長度係大部分爲2500m、 4000m。另一方面,VA型液晶顯示裝置的畫面尺寸如果是 作爲電視用途的話,畫面尺寸爲20英吋、32英吋、40英 吋、42英吋、52英吋、68英吋等。舉例,考慮到現在上 市大多爲42英吋時,以42英吋(標準4: 3)係畫面寬爲 853mm(42英吋寬 16 : 9爲 930mm),畫面高度爲 640mm(42英吋寬爲523mm)。在迄今一般係於後側配置 大相位差之薄膜的方式中,例如在1300mm、1500mm寬 的相位差薄膜係於寬度方向只有採用一種畫面用的相位差 薄膜。在本態樣由於在前側配置相位差大的薄膜,例如, -24- 201118476 即使爲1300mm、1500mm寬的相位差薄膜,若於相位差 薄膜的寬度方向採用畫面高度部分爲佳,因此,可以在寬 度方向採用二種畫面用的相位差薄膜,生產性變成近2 倍。電視的尺寸係逐年大型化,但是例如由於6 5英吋(標 準)係畫面寬爲991mm、畫面高度爲1321mm,所以在迄 今一般的後側配置中,即使經寬幅化之2 0 0 0 m m薄膜亦可 在寬度方向只有採用一種畫面用的相位差薄膜,如本態樣 般,前側配置係於寬度方向採用二種畫面用的相位差薄 膜。再者,由於68英吋(寬)係畫面寬爲1505mm、畫面高 度爲84 6mm,所以同樣地可期待近2倍的生產性。 關於本發明的 VA型液晶顯示裝置的模式可爲任一 者,具體而言可爲 MVA{Multi-domain Vertical Alignment > 多域垂直配向)型、PVA(Patterned Vertical Alignment,圖案化垂直配向)型、光配向型(Optical Alignment)、及 PSA(Polymer -Sustained Alignment, 高分子持續配向)中任一者。關於此等模式的詳細內容,係 在特開2006-215326號公報、及特表2008-538819號公 報中有詳細的記載。 如上所述,在本發明亦可使用高對比的彩色濾光片, 當然也可以使用具有一般的液晶顯示裝置之彩色濾光片。 一般而言,彩色濾光片係在基板的畫素部位配列有複數不 同顏色(例如紅、綠、藍的光的3原色、透明、黃色、青藍 色等)之彩色濾光片。其製作方法有各式各樣的,一般係例 如使用著色用的材料(有機顏料、染料、碳黑等),以調製 -25- 201118476 稱爲採用光阻之著色感光性組成物(亦有無色的情形),將 其塗布於基板之上以形成層,利用微影法進行圖案形成 者。將前述著色感光性組成物塗布於基板上的方法也有各 式各樣的,例如初期的話係採用旋轉塗布法,從省液的觀 點,則採用狹縫&旋轉型塗布法,現在的話一般係採用狹 縫·塗布法。此外,有軋輥塗布法、棒材塗布法、α模式塗 布法等。又近年來,在利用微影法形成稱爲畫素分離壁的 圖案之後,亦可利用噴墨方式進行形成畫素的顏色。除此 之外,已知有組合著色非感光性組成物與感光性正型光阻 的方法、印刷法、電沈積法、薄膜轉印法者等。本發明中 利用之彩色濾光片亦可爲用任何的方法所製作者。 關於彩色濾光片形成用的材料也沒有特別地限制。作 爲著色材料,亦可使用染料、有機顏料、無機顏料等中任 一者。染料係基於高對比化的要求而被檢討了,且近年來 有機顏料的分散技術係有所長進,以鹽硏磨法等經微細破 碎的破碎顏料、或由積累法之微細化顏料等係被使用於高 對比化。在本發明中亦可使用任何的著色材料。 另外,本發明的正面對比提昇的效果係可藉由調整來 自背光的出射光的角度輪廓,而進一步改善。具體而言, 由於使用集光性更強的背光時增加正面對比的絶對値,所 以在本發明所示之正面CR絶對値的增加分也變大了。集 光性的指標係例如以在極角45度的出射光強度1(45。)的 比1(01/1(45^對在正面的出射光強度1(0°)來表示,該値 越大的話,形成所謂集光性強的背光。作爲集光性高的背 -26- .201118476 光,在擴散薄膜與液晶面板之間設置具備光集光功能之稜 鏡薄膜(稜鏡層)係爲所期望的。該棱鏡薄膜係使從導光板 的光出射面出射、在擴散薄膜被擴散的光,高效率且集光 於液晶面板的有效顯示區域者。搭載一般直下型方式的背 光之液晶顯示裝置,例如係在上部設置有由處於透明基板 或偏光板之間的彩色濾光片、液晶層所構成之液晶面板, 與在其下面側設置有背光。以美國3M公司的註冊商標之 亮度強調薄膜(Brightness Enhancement Film : BEF)爲 代表例。BEF係在薄膜基材上使剖面三角形狀的單位稜鏡 朝一方向周期性配列的薄膜,稜鏡與光的波長比較爲大尺 寸(間距)的。BEF係集光來自“軸外(off-axis)”的光,且將 該光朝向觀眾於“軸上(on-ax is)”進行方向轉換(redirect) 或“再循環(recycle)”。作爲揭示有將BEF爲代表的稜鏡中 具有反復的陣列構造之亮度控制構件採用於顯示器爲要點 的專利文獻,已知有許多例示於特公平1 - 3 7 8 0 1號公報、 特開平6-102506號公報、特表平10-506500號公報。 另外,爲了提高集光性而使用透鏡陣列片亦爲所期望 的。透鏡陣列片係具有將以規定的間距形成爲凸狀之複數 個單位透鏡配列成2次元而成的透鏡面。該透鏡面的反對 側係形成平坦面’在前述平坦面上形成有反射光線於前述 透鏡之非集光面領域的光反射層而成的透鏡陣列片爲佳》 另外’爲將以規定的間距所形成之凸狀的柱面透鏡複數個 於平行方向配列而成的雙凸透鏡面時,其透鏡面之反對側 係形成平坦面,在前述平坦面上亦可形成有於前述凸狀之 -27- 201118476 柱面透鏡的非集光面領域內反射長度方向的條紋狀光線之 光反射層而成的透鏡陣列片。另外,例如亦可使用將由柱 面狀的曲面所構成之單位透鏡朝面内一方向配列而成的雙 凸透鏡陣列片,或是將由具有圓形、矩形、六角形等的底 面形狀之圓頂狀的曲面所構成之單位透鏡,朝面内2次元 配列而成的透鏡陣列片等。關於此等的透鏡陣列片係在特 開平 10-241434 號、特開 2001-201611 號、特開 2007-256575 號、特開 2006-106197 號、特開 2006- 208930 號、特開 2007-2 13035 號、及特開 2007- 41172號等的各公報中有記載,可加以參照。 本發明係藉由調整背光的出射光光譜、及彩色濾光片 的透過光譜,在擴大色再現域之顯示器的態樣中亦可表現 出效果。具體而言,最好是在背光中使用組合並混合紅色 LED、綠色LED及藍色LEO之白色背光。另外,紅色LED、 綠色LED及藍色LED的出射光波峰之半値幅度小爲佳。 LED的情形中,與CCFL相比,半値波長幅度小至20nm 左右,又藉由將波峰波長形成R (紅)爲610nm以上、G (綠) 爲530nm、B (藍)爲480nm以下,可提高光源本身的色純 度。 另外,已報告有在LED之波峰波長以外,藉由儘可能 縮小並抑制彩色濾光片的分光透過率,可進而使色再現性 提昇,且 NTSC比可具有 1 00%的特性。例如,在特開 2004-78102號公報中有記載。紅色彩色濾光片最好是綠 色LED及藍色LED在波峰位置的透過率較小,綠色彩色 -28- 201118476 濾光片最好是藍色LED及紅LED在波峰位置的透過率較 小,藍彩色濾光片最好是紅色LED及綠色LED在波峰位 置的透過率較小。具體而言,此等透過率最好是均爲〇.1 以下’較佳是0.03以下,更佳是〇.〇1以下。關於此等的 背光與彩色濾光片之關係係在例如特開2009-19266 1號 公報中有記載,可加以參照。 另外,由於在背光中使用雷射光源亦可擴大色再現域 而爲佳。紅、綠及藍色的雷射光源之波峰波長較佳係分別 爲 430~480nm、520〜550nm、及 620~660nm。關於雷 射光源的背光係在特開2009-14892號公報中有記載,可 加以參照。 以下,針對本發明的VA型液晶顯示裝置中所使用的 各種構件加以詳細説明。 1 .第1相位差領域 在本發明,由在前述後側偏光子與前述VA型液晶胞 之間所配置之1層或2層以上的相位差層所構成的第1相 位差領域係滿足下述式,ί S -13- 201118476 The change has not reached its limit. As a result, the light leakage occurring at the four corners of the screen observed in the conventional VA liquid crystal display device, and the so-called failure in which the display quality of the corner mura is lowered can be alleviated. Further, in the second phase difference region between the front side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, in the aspect of displaying a predetermined optical characteristic, it is possible to provide CR which can increase the oblique direction and reduce color shift when black display is performed (color Shift) liquid crystal display device. Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional schematic view showing an example of a VA liquid crystal display device of the present invention. Further, in the figure, the relative relationship of the thicknesses of the respective layers does not necessarily coincide with the relative relationship of the thicknesses of the respective layers of the actual liquid crystal display device. The VA type liquid crystal display device shown in Fig. 1 has a VA type liquid crystal cell LC, and a rear side polarizing plate PL1 and a front side polarizing plate PL2 sandwiching the same. The backlight 10 is disposed on the outer side of the rear polarizing plate PL1, and the light from the backlight 1 is incident in the order of the rear polarizing plate PL1, the liquid crystal cell LC, and the front polarizing plate PL2. Composition. The liquid crystal cell LC is a VA mode liquid crystal cell which becomes vertical alignment when black is displayed. The liquid crystal cell LC is formed by arranging the upper substrate 26 and the lower substrate .24 formed of glass or the like, and has an alignment film (not shown) and an electrode layer (not shown) on the substrate. Further, a color filter layer (not shown) is provided on the substrate on the front side. The rear polarizing plate PL1 has a polarizer 12, a first retardation film 16 and an outer protective film 20 on the surface thereof, and a front polarizing plate PL2, respectively, having a polarizer 14 and a second retardation film on the surface thereof. 18 -14- 201118476 and outer protective film 22. The polarizers 12 and 14 are arranged such that their absorption axes are orthogonal to each other. The first retardation film disposed between the polarizer 12 of the rear polarizing plate PL1 and the liquid crystal cell LC is a retardation film satisfying 〇nm S Re(590) ^ 10 nm and |Rth(590)|^ 25 nm. In the range satisfying this characteristic, a plurality of retardation films may be present. For example, a protective film of the polarizer 12 may be additionally disposed between the first retardation film 16 and the polarizer 12, but the phase difference between the first retardation film 16 and the protective film is equal to 〇nm S Re (590) S l〇nm' and I Rth(590)丨S 25nm. That is, a plurality of retardation films may be present between the polarizer 12 and the liquid crystal cell LC, but the total phase difference of the plurality of sheets satisfies the above characteristics. By satisfying the above characteristics by the retardation film disposed between the polarizer 12 and the liquid crystal cell LC, the VA type liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. 1 can suppress oblique incident light from the backlight 1 to be incident on the liquid crystal cell LC. The previous roundness was polarized. As a result, the contrast reduction caused by the reasons (1) and (ii) above can be alleviated, and a high positive CR can be achieved. As a result of intensive review by the present inventors, the effects of the present invention are known in the front side substrate of the VA type liquid crystal cell (including the substrate 26 of FIG. 1 and all the members formed on the substrate). The aspect of the substrate comparison (C Rr) of the substrate (including the substrate 24 in FIG. 1 and all the members formed on the substrate) becomes particularly remarkable. Further, the ratio (CRf/CRr) of the component contrast (CRr) of the member of the front substrate to the rear substrate is CR or more, that is, in the case where the 3 S CRf/CRr is known, the effect of the present invention becomes Significant. Here, when the VA type liquid crystal cell (LC in Fig. 1) is decomposed in two substrates (substrates 24 and 26 in Fig. 1), the front side substrate (Fig. [S] -15-201118476 1 in the substrate 26 The collective name of the member formed on the substrate, the substrate (the substrate 24 in FIG. 1) on the rear side of the front substrate, and the member formed on the substrate are collectively referred to as the rear substrate. Examples of the member include a color filter, a black matrix, an array member (such as a TFT array), a projection on a substrate, a common electrode, a slit, and the like, and various members. That is, the comparison of the members of the rear substrate and the front substrate of the liquid crystal cells refers to the comparison of the respective substrates and the various members formed on the respective substrates. The details of the measurement method are described in the examples below. As a result of intensive review by the inventors of the present invention, it is known that the retardation in the field of the first phase difference between the back side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell greatly affects the front surface CR of the liquid crystal display device. This reason is due to the so-called scattering of liquid crystal cells in various members (for example, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter, a black matrix, an array member, a protrusion formed on a substrate, a common electrode member, a slit member, etc.). Optical phenomena with diffraction and polarization dependence for their optical phenomena. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in detail. In general, since the liquid crystal layer is in a vertical alignment state when the VA liquid crystal display device is displayed in black, the polarization state does not change even after passing through the liquid crystal layer after the linear polarization of the rear side polarizer and moving in the normal direction. In principle, all of the absorption axes of the front side photons are absorbed. That is, it can be said that in principle, there is no light leakage in the normal direction in the black display. However, the front transmittance of the VA type liquid crystal display device at the time of black display is not zero. The reason is that the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer are shaken, and it is known that light incident on the liquid crystal layer is shaken to some extent. Was scattered. The more completely the light system incident on the liquid crystal layer does not contain the linearly polarized light component absorbed by the absorption axis of the front side polarizer, the greater the influence becomes, and the tendency of the front light leakage increases. . In other words, when the phase difference in the phase difference region disposed on the rear side is larger, and the rounded polarization is converted into a high circular polarization, the front light leakage caused by the shaking can be reduced. However, as a result of the review by the inventors, it is known that the phase difference in the phase difference region between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal layer is one of the causes, in addition to the shaking of the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer. A certain light from the directivity of the backlight passes through the back side polarizer, and when it enters the phase difference field from the oblique direction, the linearly polarized light is converted into a circularly polarized light due to the phase difference. The circular polarization is diffracted and scattered by the array member in the liquid crystal cell and the color filter layer, and at least a portion becomes light advancing in the front direction. Since the circularly polarized light contains a linearly polarized component that cannot be cut by the absorption axis of the front side polarizer, it causes light leakage in the front direction and a decrease in the front CR even in the case of black display. The optical phenomenon generated by the array member and the color filter layer is not completely smooth, for example, on the surface of the array member and the color filter layer, and has a certain degree of unevenness or a scattering factor or the like in the member. The effect caused by the optical phenomenon generated by the array member and the color filter layer on the light leakage in the front direction is greater than that caused by the shaking of the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer described above. Furthermore, as a result of the intent of the present inventors, the optical phenomenon (diffraction, scattering, etc.) which is obtained by passing through the predetermined member of the liquid crystal cell by the light which is circularly polarized by the phase difference field is known. The aspect in which light passes through the member before entering the liquid crystal layer or after passing through the liquid crystal layer, and affects light leakage in the front direction becomes different. In FIG. 1, -17-201118476, for example, as shown in FIG. 2(a), an array member is disposed on the inner surface of the rear substrate 24, and when a color filter is disposed on the inner surface of the front substrate 26, light is present. Passing through the array member before entering the liquid crystal layer, and passing through the color filter after passing through the liquid crystal layer. In the member (e.g., the array member) through which light is incident before the liquid crystal layer, the circular polarization of the incident light is determined by the phase difference of the region of the rear phase difference (the first phase difference region) passing through it. On the other hand, the member (e.g., color filter) that passes after entering the liquid crystal layer is determined by the phase difference in the back phase difference region, and is also determined by the phase difference of the liquid crystal layer. Here, in the case of a liquid crystal display device for VA, Δ nd (590) of the liquid crystal layer (thickness (nm) of the d-type liquid crystal layer, and refractive index anisotropy of the liquid crystal layer at the wavelength λ of the d-type liquid crystal layer, AndU The product Δη(λ) and d) is set at about 2 80 to 3 50 nm. It is also possible to set the phase difference in the field of the rear side phase difference so that the light leakage of the array member is reduced, and the rounding ratio is inversely increased when passing through the liquid crystal. Since the rounding ratio of the incident polarized light becomes smaller as the phase difference in the back phase difference region is larger, the rear side phase is set in accordance with the member that is incident on the light before passing through the liquid crystal layer or the member that is incident on the light after passing through the liquid crystal layer. The phase difference in the difference field, the result reverses the effect of the component on the light leakage in the front direction. The level of the phase difference in the rear phase difference region, the tendency to influence the light leakage in the front direction through the respective members, and the influence of the influence thereof are summarized in Fig. 2(b). In addition, in Fig. 2(b), "t" indicates that the rear phase difference field can improve the effect of the front CR as compared with the case of the high hysteresis, and "I." indicates the effect of lowering the front CR. The number of roots is a weak reference for '201118476', and the greater the number of roots, the stronger the effect. As shown in Fig. 2(b), the color filter is disposed on the front substrate and the array member is disposed on the rear substrate. In the case of the VA type liquid crystal display device, when the phase difference in the phase difference of the rear side is lowered, the optical phenomenon caused by the array member disposed on the rear substrate causes the light leakage in the front direction to act in the mitigating direction, and On the one hand, the optical phenomenon caused by the color filter layer disposed on the front substrate causes the light leakage in the front direction to act in an increasing direction, that is, the relationship between the two sides is offset. For example, on the back side In the same manner as the both sides of the substrate and the front substrate, the liquid crystal cell is formed as a member that causes a decrease in contrast, and the first phase difference region on the rear side is low hysteresis, and is also disposed on the rear substrate. member (for example, in FIG. 2(b) is an array member), the effect of the front surface CR is increased, or the member disposed on the front side substrate (for example, the CF member in FIG. 2(b)) reduces the effect of the front surface CR, and there are some eliminations. In other words, the feature of the present invention in which the first phase difference region in the rear side is a low hysteresis is that the rear substrate has many components that cause a decrease in contrast, and is displayed. In addition, the retardation in the first phase difference region on the rear side and the influence on the front surface CR are substantially negligible in the liquid crystal display device having a low front CR. However, it is provided in recent years. The liquid crystal display device having a high front CR (for example, a front CR of 1500 or more) cannot be ignored in the case of further improving the front surface CR. The present invention is directed to a liquid crystal display device having a front CR of 1500 or more, and further improving the front CR. In particular, FIG. 2 shows a general liquid crystal cell having a color filter (CF.) on the inner surface of the front substrate 26 and an array member on the inner surface of the rear substrate 24. As an example, in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the positions of the CF and the array member are arbitrary. For example, if the color filter is directly disposed on the array (COA, color filter on array), CF The aspect disposed on the side of the substrate side having the array member is of course also included in the present invention. Further, if the array member is disposed on the side of the front substrate 26, the function of the array member becomes the same as that in FIG. 2(b). The CF members are the same, and if the CF is disposed on the side of the rear substrate 24, the function of the CF member becomes the same as that of the array member of Fig. 2(b). The same is true for other members (for example, black matrix) not shown. If the member is disposed on the front substrate 26 side, the array member functions as the CF member in FIG. 2(b), and if the member is disposed on the rear substrate 24 side, the member The action system becomes the same as the array member of Fig. 2(b). As described above, it is known that the ratio of the component contrast (CRr) of the member-side contrast CRCR to the rear side substrate (the substrate 24 in FIG. 1) (CRf/CRr) is 3 or more in the front substrate (the substrate 26 in FIG. 1). That is, the aspect of 3 S CRf/CRr is satisfied, and the effect of the present invention becomes remarkable. As an example of the liquid crystal cell satisfying the relationship, for example, the rear substrate is a liquid crystal cell of a CO A substrate. The CO A is described in detail in the publications of JP-A-2005-99499 and JP-A-2005-258004. In addition, as described above, the incident polarization state dependence of light leakage during black display due to optical phenomena in CF, black matrix, and array members all tend to be the same, but the contribution from the black matrix The relative -20-201118476 is small, so the COA formed by disposing the c F on the side of the substrate side after the array member can be located at any position in the liquid crystal cell at the black matrix position of the liquid crystal display device, preferably on the back side. Between the polarizer and the liquid crystal layer. Further, examples of the liquid crystal cell satisfying 3 S CRf/CRr may be, for example, a liquid crystal cell having no color filter, and a liquid crystal cell driven without field sequential printing of a color filter. The liquid crystal cell which is driven by the field sequential system is described in detail in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2009-42446, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. Hei. No. Hei. Reference. The so-called field sequential driving system utilizes a backlight unit that sequentially emits independent three primary colors of light. A backlight unit having an LED is preferable as the light source. For example, a backlight unit having a light-emitting element of red, green, and blue as a light source is preferably used. In addition, an array member may be disposed on the rear substrate, and a liquid crystal cell of a general color filter may be disposed on the front substrate. If the contrast of the color filter is high, the above conditions are of course satisfied. 3 $CRf/CRr of a preferred aspect of the invention. As an example of the high-contrast color filter, a color filter using a pigment having a smaller particle diameter can be used as compared with the pigment used in CF. As an example of a method for producing a high contrast color filter using a pigment, the following two methods can be mentioned. (I) A method of mechanically finely pulverizing pigment particles by using a disperser called a sand mill, a roll mill, or a ball mill, and is described in detail in JP-A-2009-144126, for example, and can be referred to. . (II) A method of adjusting the fine pigment particles of Micro-21-201118476 by dissolving the pigment in a solvent and then precipitating it is described in detail in JP-A-2009-134 1 78. In addition to pigments, a method of using dyes to produce high contrast color filters has also been proposed. A detailed description is given in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2005-173532, which is incorporated herein by reference. By using such a highly contrast-colored color filter, even a general configuration can be a liquid crystal cell satisfying each of CRf/CRr. Further, in Fig. 1, the optical characteristics of the second retardation film 18 having the front side polarizing plate PL2 are preferably used to improve the contrast in the oblique direction and to reduce the color shift in the black display. Further, And(;l) of the liquid crystal layer of the VA type liquid crystal cell LC is as described above, and is generally about 280 to 350 nm. The retardation 値 of the second retardation film 18, particularly the preferred range of Rth, can be varied in accordance with the Δη(1(λ) of the liquid crystal layer. To improve the oblique contrast, the comparison with Δη^; A combination of a good retardation film is described in various publications, and is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Nos. 3,282,986, 3,666,666, and 3,556,159, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. The preferred range of the optical characteristics in the second phase difference field is as follows. Further, Δη ά (590) of the VA type liquid crystal cell is generally about 280 to 350 nm, in order to increase the transmittance at the time of white display as much as possible. On the other hand, when Δ nd (590) is 280 nm or less, the white luminance is slightly lowered with the decrease of ^11 (1 (590), but since the thickness d of the unit cell is small, high-speed response is obtained. In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, if the first retardation field in the rear side is low hysteresis, the light leakage in the front direction becomes small. 22-201118476 The so-called high front surface R R is obtained. It is effective in any Δη (1 (590) liquid crystal display device. The VA liquid crystal display device of Fig. 1 shows that the first retardation film 16 and the second retardation film 18 are used as the polarizers 12 and 14, respectively. The protective film also has a functional embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the embodiment. For example, between the first retardation film and the second retardation film and the polarizers 12 and 14, polarized light may be disposed by other methods. As described above, the protective film disposed between the first retardation film and the polarizer 12 is all of the laminated body of the first retardation film, and must satisfy the first phase difference. Obtained characteristics In addition, the rear side polarizer 12 has a protective film 20 on the surface of the backlight 10 side thereof, and further has an antifouling film, an antireflection film, an anti-glare film, an antistatic film, etc. on the surface thereof. In addition, the front side polarizer 14 has a protective film 22 on its display surface side surface, and further has an antifouling film, an antireflection film, an anti-glare film, and the like on the surface thereof. A functional film such as an antistatic film. However, in the case where a large phase difference is shared on one side to perform optical compensation as described above, a film having a large phase difference is conventionally disposed on the rear side. The present invention is generally disposed on the front side, and it is generally considered that the yield as a polarizing plate can be improved. The reason is explained. The film having a large phase difference has a step of extending at a high magnification because it does not add a lot of additives to the film. It is also possible to manufacture an inexpensive film (so-called flat TAC = Re is 0~10nm, Rth is 30~80nm triethylene cellulose film, etc.), or with a small phase difference -23-201118476 Compared with the film, it is difficult to widen the film. In a general liquid crystal display device, a horizontal liquid crystal cell is used, and the absorption axis of the front side polarizer is generally arranged in the horizontal direction (left-right direction), and the absorption of the rear side photon is used. The shaft is arranged in a vertical direction (up and down direction). Further, in industrial production, a roll-to-roll method is generally used to bond a polarizer and a retardation film. When the polarizing plate is bonded to the liquid crystal cell, the film having a large phase difference is disposed on the front side, and the width direction of the polarizing plate can be used with high efficiency, and the yield can be improved. The rear side is disposed as in the present invention. In the case of a phase difference film having a small phase difference, it is easy to make the film into a wide film, and the yield can be further improved by combining with a wide polarizer. As a result, the amount of discarded polarizing plates can be reduced. Here, specific numbers are used for explanation. In general, the width of the retardation film is mostly 1100 mm, 1300 mm, 1500 mm, 2000 mm, 2500 mm > the thickness of the film is mostly 25/zm, 40//m, 80# m. The roll length of the wound film is mostly 2500 m and 4000 m. On the other hand, if the screen size of the VA type liquid crystal display device is for television use, the screen size is 20 inches, 32 inches, 40 inches, 42 inches, 52 inches, 68 inches, and the like. For example, considering that the 42-inch (standard 4:3) screen width is 853mm (42 inches wide and 16:9 is 930mm), the screen height is 640mm (42 inches wide). 523mm). In the conventional mode in which a film having a large phase difference is disposed on the rear side, for example, a retardation film of 1300 mm and 1500 mm width is used as a phase difference film for one screen in the width direction. In this aspect, since a film having a large phase difference is disposed on the front side, for example, -24-201118476, even if it is a 1300 mm or 1500 mm wide retardation film, if the height of the phase difference film is used in the width direction of the phase difference film, it is possible to be in the width. The phase difference film for the two screens is used in the direction, and the productivity is nearly doubled. The size of the TV is increased year by year, but for example, since the picture width of the 65-inch (standard) system is 991 mm and the picture height is 1321 mm, even in the conventional rear side configuration, even the widened 2 0 0 0 mm The film may be a phase difference film which uses only one type of picture in the width direction. As in this aspect, the front side is arranged in a phase difference film for two kinds of pictures in the width direction. Further, since the screen width of the 68-inch (wide) screen is 1505 mm and the screen height is 84 6 mm, nearly twice as much productivity can be expected. The mode of the VA liquid crystal display device of the present invention may be any one, specifically, MVA {Multi-domain Vertical Alignment> multi-domain vertical alignment type, PVA (Patterned Vertical Alignment) type. Any of Optical Alignment and PSA (Polymer-Sustained Alignment). The details of these modes are described in detail in JP-A-2006-215326 and JP-A-2008-538819. As described above, a high contrast color filter can also be used in the present invention, and a color filter having a general liquid crystal display device can of course be used. In general, a color filter is a color filter in which a plurality of different colors (e.g., three primary colors of red, green, and blue light, transparent, yellow, cyan, etc.) are arranged in a pixel portion of a substrate. There are various methods for producing the same, and generally, for example, a material for coloring (organic pigment, dye, carbon black, etc.) is used to prepare a color-sensitive photosensitive composition using a photoresist (also known as colorless). In the case of the pattern, it is applied on a substrate to form a layer, and the pattern is formed by a lithography method. There are various methods for applying the colored photosensitive composition to a substrate. For example, in the initial stage, a spin coating method is used, and from the viewpoint of liquid storage, a slit & rotary coating method is used. A slit coating method is employed. Further, there are a roll coating method, a bar coating method, an α mode coating method, and the like. Further, in recent years, after a pattern called a pixel separation wall is formed by a lithography method, a color of a pixel can be formed by an inkjet method. In addition, a method of combining a colored non-photosensitive composition and a photosensitive positive resist, a printing method, an electrodeposition method, a film transfer method, and the like are known. The color filter used in the present invention can also be produced by any method. The material for forming the color filter is also not particularly limited. As the coloring material, any one of a dye, an organic pigment, and an inorganic pigment can also be used. The dyes have been reviewed based on the requirements of high contrast, and in recent years, the dispersion technology of organic pigments has been advanced, and finely crushed pigments such as salt honing methods or micronized pigments by the accumulation method have been used. Used for high contrast. Any coloring material can also be used in the present invention. In addition, the effect of the front contrast enhancement of the present invention can be further improved by adjusting the angular profile of the outgoing light from the backlight. Specifically, since the absolute contrast of the front contrast is increased when the backlight having a higher light collection property is used, the increase in the absolute 値 of the front CR shown in the present invention also becomes large. The index of the light collecting property is expressed, for example, by a ratio 1 (01/1 (45° pairs of outgoing light intensity 1 (0°) at the front side) at a polar angle of 45 degrees (45°). When it is large, a so-called light-collecting backlight is formed. As a light-collecting back -26-.201118476 light, a ruthenium film having a light collecting function is provided between the diffusion film and the liquid crystal panel. In the prism film, the light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate and diffused by the diffusion film is efficiently collected in an effective display area of the liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal of the backlight of a general direct type is mounted. The display device is provided, for example, on a liquid crystal panel composed of a color filter or a liquid crystal layer between a transparent substrate or a polarizing plate, and a backlight provided on a lower surface side thereof. The brightness of a registered trademark of 3M Company of the United States Brightness Enhancement Film (BEF) is a representative example. BEF is a film in which the unit of the triangular shape of the cross-section is periodically arranged in one direction on the film substrate, and the wavelength of the light is compared with the wavelength of the light to have a large size (pitch). B The EF system collects light from "off-axis" and redirects or "recycles" the light toward the viewer on the "on-ax is". A patent document having a repeating array structure in which a BEF is represented by a repeating array structure is disclosed in the patent document, and many examples are known in the Japanese Patent Publication No. 1 - 3 7 8 0 1 and JP-A-6- Further, it is also preferable to use a lens array sheet in order to improve the light collecting property. The lens array sheet has a plurality of unit lenses which are formed into a convex shape at a predetermined pitch. a lens surface in which a lens surface is arranged in a second dimension. The lens surface of the lens surface is formed by a light-reflecting layer in which the light-reflecting layer in the non-light-collecting surface of the lens is formed on the flat surface. In addition, in order to form a lenticular lens surface in which a convex cylindrical lens formed at a predetermined pitch is arranged in a parallel direction, the opposite side of the lens surface forms a flat surface, and the flat surface is also formed on the flat surface. Can form a lens array sheet formed by reflecting a light reflection layer of stripe-shaped light in the longitudinal direction in the non-light-collecting surface of the convex -27-201118476 cylindrical lens. Alternatively, for example, a cylindrical curved surface may be used. a lenticular lens array sheet in which the unit lenses are arranged in one direction in the plane, or a unit lens formed of a dome-shaped curved surface having a bottom shape of a circular shape, a rectangular shape, a hexagonal shape, or the like, and an in-plane 2 dimensional element A lens array sheet, etc., which are arranged in such a manner, are disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 10-241434, JP-A-2001-201611, JP-A-2007-256575, JP-A-2006-106197, JP-A-2006- It is described in each of the publications of No. 208,930, JP-A-2007-2,13035, and JP-A-2007-41172, and can be referred to. The present invention can also exhibit an effect in the aspect of the display in which the color reproduction domain is expanded by adjusting the spectrum of the outgoing light of the backlight and the transmission spectrum of the color filter. Specifically, it is preferable to use a white backlight that combines and mixes a red LED, a green LED, and a blue LEO in a backlight. In addition, the half-turn amplitude of the exiting light peaks of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED is preferably small. In the case of an LED, the half-turn wavelength range is as small as about 20 nm, and the peak wavelength is R (red) to 610 nm or more, G (green) to 530 nm, and B (blue) to 480 nm or less. The color purity of the light source itself. Further, it has been reported that, in addition to the peak wavelength of the LED, the spectral transmittance of the color filter can be reduced as much as possible, and the color reproducibility can be further improved, and the NTSC ratio can have a characteristic of 100%. For example, it is described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2004-78102. The red color filter preferably has a small transmittance of the green LED and the blue LED at the peak position, and the green color -28-201118476 filter preferably has a small transmittance of the blue LED and the red LED at the peak position. Preferably, the blue color filter has a small transmittance of the red LED and the green LED at the peak position. Specifically, it is preferable that these transmittances are all 〇.1 or less, preferably 0.03 or less, and more preferably 〇.〇1 or less. The relationship between the backlight and the color filter is described in, for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2009-19266, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. In addition, it is preferable to use a laser light source in the backlight to enlarge the color reproduction domain. The peak wavelengths of the red, green and blue laser sources are preferably 430-480 nm, 520-550 nm, and 620-660 nm, respectively. A backlight of a laser light source is described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2009-14892, which is incorporated herein by reference. Hereinafter, various members used in the VA liquid crystal display device of the present invention will be described in detail. 1. In the first phase difference region, the first phase difference region composed of one or two or more retardation layers disposed between the rear side polarizer and the VA type liquid crystal cell satisfies Statement,

Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 10nm,且 |Rth(590)| ^ 25nm 第1相位差領域滿足下述式爲佳,Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 10nm, and |Rth(590)| ^ 25nm The first phase difference domain satisfies the following formula,

Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 5nm,且 |Rth(590}| ^ 1 Onm 滿足下述式爲更佳。Onm ^ Re(590) ^ 5nm, and |Rth(590}| ^ 1 Onm satisfy the following formula as better.

Onm ^ Re (5 9 0) ^ 3 n m > 且 |Rth(590)| ύ 5 nm 第1相位差領域的面内遲滯値Re之波長分散,係在 可見光領域中波長增大至成爲長波長的程度、顯示所謂的Onm ^ Re (5 9 0) ^ 3 nm > and |Rth(590)| ύ 5 nm In-plane hysteresis in the first phase difference domain 値Re wavelength dispersion, in the visible light field, the wavelength increases to become a long wavelength Degree, showing so-called

r r-I -29- 201118476 逆分散 性爲佳 。 亦即 , 滿足 1^(450)<1^(550)<(1^(590)<1^(630)者爲佳.其理由係由 於第1相位差領域的Re爲逆波長分散性時,可見光領域 的中心波長爲550nm左右,且若最佳化光學特性的話,有 涵蓋可見光全域、被最適化的傾向。理想上,第1相位差 領域的Re(A)除以波長;I之値爲固定,該態樣於龐加萊球 (Pioncare ball)上的遷移在可見光領域中,同樣與波長無 關,亦可解決於斜向方向所產生之色偏移的問題。 爲了得到更高的正面CR,構成配置於後側之第1相位 差領域的相位差薄膜的霧度係以0.5以下爲佳,0.3以下 爲較佳,0.2以下爲更佳。 另外,本說明書中,薄膜的霧度的測定方法係如下所 述。準備薄膜試料40mmx80mm,在25°C、60%RH的環 境下,利用霧度計(NDH-2000、日本電色工業(股)製),依 照JIS K-6714來進行測定。 前述第1相位差領域亦可由1片或2片以上的相位差 薄膜所構成。關於其材料係沒有特別地限制。作爲滿足上 述特性之薄膜,較佳係醯化纖維素系薄膜、及丙烯酸系聚 合物薄膜。 醯化纖維素系薄膜: 在本說明書,所謂的「醯化纖維素系薄膜」係指含有 醯化纖維素爲主成分(總成分的50質量%以上)之薄膜。在 該薄膜的製作中所使用的醯化纖維素,纖維素的羥基係氫 原子被醯基所取代者。前述醯化纖維素係纖維素的羥基被 -30- 201118476 醯化者’且其取代基係可使用自醯基的碳原子數爲2的 醯基至碳原子數爲22中任一者。在本發明所使用的醯化 維素中,對於在纖維素的羥基之取代度係沒有特別地 制’測定纖維素的羥基經取代之乙酸及/或碳原子數3~ 的脂肪酸的結合度,經由計算可得到取代度。作爲測定 法,係可按照ASTM的D-817-91來實施。 另外,可利用作爲構成本發明的第1相位差相位差 域之相位差薄膜材料的醯化纖維素之例子中,包含在特 2006-184640號公報的[0019卜[0025]中詳細記載的醯 纖維素。 關於在構成前述第1相位差領域之相位差薄膜的製 中所利用之醯化纖維素的取代度係沒有特別地限制,最 是纖維素的醯基取代度爲2.30~3.00。另外,爲了得到 霧度的相位差薄膜,以醯基取代度低者爲佳,以醯基取 度爲 2.30-2.65 爲佳,2.35-2.60 爲較佳,2.40~2·60 更佳。另一方面,爲了顯示相位差薄膜爲逆波長分散性 醯基取代度高者爲佳,具體而言,以 2.65 ~ 3.00爲佳 2.75~3.00 爲較佳,2.80~3.00 爲更佳。 另外,上述醯化纖維素的醯基取代基之中,在實質 由乙醯基/丙醯基/ 丁醯基的至少2種類所構成之情形中 已知其總取代度爲2 · 3 0 ~ 3.0 0的情形中可有效地降低醯 纖維素系薄膜的光學異方向性。較佳的醯基取代度 2.35~3.00,更佳係爲 2.40~3·00° 另外,在構成前述第1相位差領域之相位差薄膜的 乙 纖 限 22 方 領 開 化 作 好 低 代 爲 上 化 係 製 -31- 201118476 作中所利用之醯化纖維素的聚合度係黏度平均聚合度爲 180~700,至於乙酸纖維素係以18〇~550爲較佳, 180~400爲更佳,180~350爲特佳。聚合度過高時,醯化 纖維素在塗布溶液的黏度變得過高,利用流延的薄膜製作 變得困難。聚合度過低時,所製作之薄膜的強度係爲降低。 另外,平均聚合度係可根據宇田等人的極限黏度法(宇田和 夫、齊藤秀夫、繊維學會刊、第18卷第1號 '第105~120 頁、1 9 6 2年)進行測定。詳細記載於特開平9 - 9 5 5 3 8中。 另外,構成前述第1相位差領域之相位差薄膜的製作 中所利用的醯化纖維素之分子量分布係根據凝膠滲透層析 法而進行評價,其多分散性指數Mw/Mn(Mw爲質量平均 分子量、Μη爲數量平均分子量)小,且分子量分布狹小爲 佳。作爲具體的Mw/Mn之値,以1.0~3·0爲佳’ 1.0-2,0 爲更佳,1.0-1.6爲最佳》 爲了製作1片或其他的薄膜同時滿足在前述第1相位 差領域中所要求之光學特性的薄膜,可同時使用醯化纖維 素與各種的添加劑。在可使用的添加劑之例子中,包含有 降低光學的異方向性之化合物、波長分散調整劑、紫外線 防止劑、可塑劑、劣化防止劑、微粒子、光學特性調整劑 等。在本發明可利用的添加劑之例子中,包含特開 2006-184640號公報的[〇〇26卜[〇218]中詳細記載的各種 添加劑。又,關於添加量的較佳範圍亦與在該欄中所記載 的較佳範圍相同。 使前述光學異方向性降低的化合物係可含有或可不含 -32- 201118476 有芳香族基。另外,使光學異方向性降低 子量爲150以上3000以下爲佳,170以 佳’ 200以上1000以下爲特佳。若在此 內的話,亦可爲特定的單體構造,亦可爲 結合之寡聚物構造、聚合物構造。 使光學異方向性降低之化合物係較 體、或熔點爲25~250°C的固體,更佳係:j 或熔點爲25~200°C的固體。另外,使光 的化合物較佳係在醯化纖維素系薄膜製作 乾燥的過程中不會揮散。 使光學異方向性降低的化合物之添加 纖維素固體含量爲0.01~30質量%爲佳, 佳,5 ~ 2 0質量%爲特佳。特別是在本發 取代度爲2.85~3.00的醯化纖維素,較佳 添加至少一種的使前述光學異方向性降低 另外,使光學異方向性降低的化合物 亦可以任意之比混合2種以上化合物使用 光學異方向性降低的化合物之時期,在溶 塗布液調製步驟中的任何時機、亦可在塗 最後添加。 在本發明,作爲第1相位差領域的一 之醯化纖維素系薄膜,較佳係利用溶液繞 該方法中,可使用溶解醯化纖維素於有機 液)以製造薄膜。使用上述添加劑的情形, 的化合物係以分 上2000以下爲 等分子量的範圍 其單體單元複數 佳在 25°C爲液 £ 2 5 °C爲液體、 學異方向性降低 的塗布液流延、 量,相對於醯化 1 ~ 2 5質量%爲較 明,相對於醯基 係用上述添加量 之化合物。 係可單獨使用、 。另外,添加使 液製膜法係可爲 布液調製步驟的 部或全部所使用 鑄法而製造。.在 溶媒之溶液(塗布 添加劑係可在塗 -33- 201118476 布液調製的任何時機添加。關於可利用於本發明之醯化纖 維素系薄膜的製造方法,可參照特開2006-184640號公 報的[0219卜[0224】的記載。 亦可使用共流延法、逐次流延法、塗布法等的積層流 延法以作爲前述溶液澆鑄法。利用共流延法及逐次流延法 製造之情形中,首先調製各層用的醯化纖維素溶液(塗布 液)。共流延法(多層同時流延)係在流延用支持體(皮帶或滾 筒)之上’從由另外的狹縫等同時壓出各層(可爲3層或是 其以上)各自的流延用塗布液之流延用噴嘴來壓出塗布 液,各層同時流延、於適當的時期自支持體上剝離、乾燥, 以形成薄膜之流延法。 逐次流延法係以首先在流延用支持體之上,自流延用 噴嘴壓出、流延第1層用的流延用塗布液,乾燥或是不乾 燥,於其上自流延用噴嘴壓出第2層用的流延用塗布液爲 進行流延之要點,如果必要可逐次流延·積層塗布液至第3 層以上,於適當的時期自支持體剝離、乾燥,以成形薄膜 之流延法。 一般而言,塗布法係利用溶液製膜法使芯層的薄膜成 形爲薄膜,調製塗布於表層的塗布液,使用適當的塗布機, 在各單面或兩面上同時塗布·乾燥塗布液成薄膜,以成形積 層構造之薄膜的方法。 丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜: 丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜係以具有由(甲基)丙烯酸酯的至 少1種所誘導之重複單位的丙烯酸系聚合物當作主成分的 -34- 201118476 薄膜β該丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜的較佳例係包含由(甲基)丙 嫌酸醋所誘導之重複單位,以及由內酯環單位、馬來酸酐 單位、及戊二酸酐單位所選出之至少1種單位的丙烯酸系 聚合物。關於該丙烯酸系聚合物係在特開2008-9378號公 報有詳細的記載,可加以參照。 作爲薄膜成形的方法,係可利用各種的薄膜成形方 法,例如可舉出溶液澆鑄法(溶液流延法)、熔融擠壓法、 壓延法、壓縮成形法等。此等的薄膜成形方法之中,特佳 爲溶液澆鑄法(溶液流延法)、熔融擠壓法。 作爲溶液澆鑄法(溶液流延法)中所使用的溶媒,可舉 出例如氯仿、二氯甲烷等的氯系溶媒;甲苯、二甲苯、苯 等的芳香族系溶媒;甲醇、乙醇、異丙醇、正丁醇、2-丁 醇等的醇系溶媒;甲基溶纖劑、乙基溶纖劑、丁基溶纖劑、 二甲基甲醯胺、二甲亞颯、二噁烷、環己酮、四氫呋喃、 丙酮、甲基乙基酮、乙酸乙酯、二乙醚等。此等溶媒係可 單獨使用、亦可倂用2種以上。 作爲進行溶液澆鑄法(溶液流延法)用的裝置,可舉出 例如滾筒式澆鑄機、皮帶式澆鑄機、旋轉式塗布機等。 作爲熔融擠壓法係可舉出T壓模法、吹塑成形法等, 此時薄膜的成形溫度係較佳爲 150~350°C ,更佳爲 200-300 °C 〇 另外,構成有配置於後側之第1相位差領域的相位差 薄膜的厚度係越薄越佳,惟爲了抑制角落不均,必須減小 因落在相位差薄膜上的應力所致的相位差薄膜變形。從抑 -35- 201118476 制角落不均及製造適性的觀點而言,構成第1相位差領域. 之相位差薄膜的膜厚爲20/zm以上、200//m以下爲佳。 2.第2相位差領域 配置於前側偏光子與液晶胞之間的第2相位差領域, 較佳係調整其光學特性以有助於提昇斜向方向的對比、及 減輕黑顯示時的色偏移。較佳的第2相位差領域之一例係 滿足 30nm ^ Re(590) ^ 9 Onm,且 1 70nm ^r r-I -29- 201118476 Reverse dispersion is preferred. That is, it is preferable to satisfy 1^(450)<1^(550)<(1^(590)<1^(630). The reason is that Re in the first phase difference domain is inverse wavelength dispersion. In the case of the property, the center wavelength in the visible light region is about 550 nm, and if the optical characteristics are optimized, the entire visible light region is optimized and optimized. Ideally, the Re(A) in the first phase difference domain is divided by the wavelength; The crucible is fixed, and the migration on the Pioncare ball in the visible light field is also independent of the wavelength, and can also solve the problem of color shift caused by the oblique direction. The front surface CR of the retardation film which is disposed in the first phase difference region disposed on the rear side is preferably 0.5 or less, preferably 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less. Further, in the present specification, the film is fogged. The measurement method of the degree is as follows. The film sample is prepared to be 40 mm x 80 mm, and a haze meter (NDH-2000, manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd.) is used in an environment of 25 ° C and 60% RH in accordance with JIS K-6714. The measurement may be performed by one or two or more retardation films. The material is not particularly limited. As the film satisfying the above characteristics, a cellulose-based film and an acrylic polymer film are preferred. The cellulose-based film: In the present specification, the so-called "deuteration" "Cellulose-based film" refers to a film containing deuterated cellulose as a main component (50% by mass or more of the total component). In the production of the film, the cellulose-derived hydroxyl-based hydrogen atom is deuterated. The thiol group of the above-mentioned deuterated cellulose-based cellulose is -30-201118476 and its substituent system can use a fluorenyl group having 2 carbon atoms from the fluorenyl group to 22 carbon atoms. In the deuterated vitamins used in the present invention, the degree of substitution of the hydroxyl group in the cellulose is not particularly determined as 'the determination of the cellulose-substituted hydroxyl group of acetic acid and/or the fatty acid having 3 to 3 carbon atoms. The degree of substitution can be obtained by calculation. The measurement method can be carried out in accordance with ASTM D-817-91. Further, a phase difference film material constituting the first phase difference phase difference domain of the present invention can be used. Suihua In the case of the sulphate, the ruthenium cellulose described in detail in [0019] [0025] of the Japanese Patent Publication No. 2006-184640 is used. The degree of substitution of the cellulose is not particularly limited, and the degree of substitution of the thiol group of the cellulose is 2.30 to 3.00. In addition, in order to obtain a retardation film having a haze, it is preferred that the thiol substitution degree is low, and the thiol group is preferably used. The degree is preferably 2.30-2.65, 2.35-2.60 is better, and 2.40~2·60 is better. On the other hand, in order to show that the retardation film has a higher degree of reverse wavelength dispersion thiol substitution, specifically, Preferably, 2.65 to 3.00 is 2.75 to 3.00, and 2.80 to 3.00 is more preferable. Further, among the mercapto substituents of the above deuterated cellulose, the total substitution degree is known to be 2 · 3 0 to 3.0 0 in the case of substantially consisting of at least two types of ethyl fluorenyl / propyl fluorenyl / butyl fluorenyl groups. In the case of the film, the optical anisotropy of the yttrium cellulose-based film can be effectively reduced. The preferred thiol substitution degree is 2.35 to 3.00, and more preferably 2.40 to 30,000. Further, in the phase difference film constituting the first phase difference, the fiber-optic film 22 is opened to a lower level. System-31- 201118476 The degree of polymerization of deuterated cellulose used in the process is 180-700. The cellulose acetate is preferably 18〇-550, 180~400 is better, 180 ~350 is especially good. When the degree of polymerization is too high, the viscosity of the deuterated cellulose in the coating solution becomes too high, and it becomes difficult to produce the film by casting. When the degree of polymerization is too low, the strength of the produced film is lowered. In addition, the average degree of polymerization can be measured according to the limit viscosity method of Uda et al. (Uda Kazuo, Saito Hideo, The Society of Science and Technology, Vol. 18, No. 1 'pp. 105-120, 1962). It is described in detail in Unexamined 9 - 9 5 5 3 8 . Further, the molecular weight distribution of the deuterated cellulose used in the production of the retardation film in the first phase difference region is evaluated by gel permeation chromatography, and the polydispersity index Mw/Mn (Mw is mass) The average molecular weight, Μη is a number average molecular weight), and the molecular weight distribution is narrow. As a specific Mw/Mn, 1.0~3·0 is better '1.0-2, 0 is better, 1.0-1.6 is the best." In order to make one piece or other film, the first phase difference is satisfied at the same time. The film of optical properties required in the field can simultaneously use deuterated cellulose and various additives. Examples of the usable additive include a compound which reduces the optical anisotropy, a wavelength dispersion adjuster, an ultraviolet preventive agent, a plasticizer, a deterioration preventive agent, fine particles, an optical property adjuster, and the like. Examples of the additives which can be used in the present invention include various additives described in detail in [〇〇26卜 [〇218] of JP-A-2006-184640. Further, the preferred range of the added amount is also the same as the preferred range described in the column. The compound which reduces the aforementioned optical anisotropy may or may not contain an aromatic group of -32-201118476. Further, it is preferable that the optical anisotropy reduction amount is 150 or more and 3,000 or less, and 170 is preferably 200 or more and 1000 or less. In this case, it may be a specific monomer structure or a combined oligomer structure or polymer structure. The compound which lowers the optical anisotropy is a solid or a solid having a melting point of 25 to 250 ° C, more preferably: j or a solid having a melting point of 25 to 200 ° C. Further, it is preferred that the compound of light is not volatilized during the drying process of the deuterated cellulose film. Addition of a compound which lowers optical anisotropy The cellulose solid content is preferably 0.01 to 30% by mass, preferably 5 to 20% by mass. In particular, in the case of the deuterated cellulose having a degree of substitution of 2.85 to 3.00, it is preferred to add at least one of the compounds to reduce the optical anisotropy and to reduce the optical anisotropy, and to mix two or more compounds at an arbitrary ratio. The period in which the compound having reduced optical anisotropy is used may be added at the end of the coating solution preparation step or at the end of the coating. In the present invention, as a cellulose-based film of the first phase difference, it is preferred to use a solution around the method, and it is possible to use a solution of dissolving deuterated cellulose in an organic liquid to produce a film. In the case of using the above-mentioned additives, the compound is in a range of equal molecular weight of 2,000 or less, and the number of monomer units is preferably a liquid at 25 ° C, a liquid at a temperature of 25 ° C, and a coating liquid having a reduced directionality. The amount is preferably 1 to 25 mass% relative to the hydrazine, and the compound is added in an amount relative to the hydrazine group. Can be used alone, . Further, the addition of the liquid film forming method can be carried out by using a part or all of the casting method used in the cloth liquid preparation step. The solution of the solvent (the coating additive can be added at any timing of the preparation of the coating liquid of the coating-33-201118476. For the production method of the cellulose-based film which can be used in the present invention, reference is made to JP-A-2006-184640 [0219] [0224]. A layer casting method such as a co-casting method, a sequential casting method, or a coating method may be used as the solution casting method. The co-casting method and the sequential casting method are used. In the case, first, a deuterated cellulose solution (coating liquid) for each layer is prepared. The co-casting method (multi-layer simultaneous casting) is performed on a casting support (belt or drum) from another slit or the like. At the same time, the coating liquid is extruded by a casting nozzle for each coating liquid for each layer (which may be three or more layers), and each layer is simultaneously cast, peeled off from the support at an appropriate timing, and dried. The casting method of forming a film is carried out by first casting a casting liquid for casting a first layer from a casting nozzle, and drying or not drying the coating liquid on the casting support first. The second self-casting nozzle is pressed out by the second The coating liquid for casting is used for casting, and if necessary, the coating liquid can be successively cast and laminated to the third layer or higher, and the support can be peeled off and dried at an appropriate timing to form a film casting method. In the coating method, a film of a core layer is formed into a film by a solution film forming method, and a coating liquid applied to the surface layer is prepared, and a coating liquid is simultaneously applied and dried on each side or both surfaces using a suitable coater to form a film. A method of forming a film of a laminated structure. Acrylic polymer film: an acrylic polymer film having an acrylic polymer having a repeating unit induced by at least one of (meth) acrylate as a main component - 34-201118476 Thin film β Preferred examples of the acrylic polymer film include a repeating unit induced by (meth)acrylic acid vinegar, and a lactone ring unit, a maleic anhydride unit, and a glutaric anhydride unit. At least one unit of the acrylic polymer is selected. The acrylic polymer is described in detail in JP-A-2008-9378, and can be referred to as a thin film. The molding method can be carried out by various film forming methods, and examples thereof include a solution casting method (solution casting method), a melt extrusion method, a calendering method, a compression molding method, etc. Among these film forming methods, A solution casting method (solution casting method) or a melt extrusion method is used. The solvent used in the solution casting method (solution casting method) may, for example, be a chlorine-based solvent such as chloroform or dichloromethane; toluene; An aromatic solvent such as xylene or benzene; an alcohol solvent such as methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, n-butanol or 2-butanol; methyl cellosolve, ethyl cellosolve, butyl cellosolve, Methylformamide, dimethyl hydrazine, dioxane, cyclohexanone, tetrahydrofuran, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, ethyl acetate, diethyl ether, etc. These solvents can be used alone or in combination 2 The apparatus for performing the solution casting method (solution casting method) may, for example, be a drum type casting machine, a belt type casting machine, a rotary coater or the like. Examples of the melt extrusion method include a T die method, a blow molding method, and the like. In this case, the film forming temperature is preferably 150 to 350 ° C, more preferably 200 to 300 ° C. The thickness of the retardation film in the first phase difference region on the rear side is preferably as thin as possible, but in order to suppress corner unevenness, it is necessary to reduce the phase difference film deformation due to the stress on the retardation film. The film thickness of the retardation film constituting the first phase difference field is preferably 20/zm or more and 200//m or less, from the viewpoint of the corner unevenness and the manufacturing suitability of the -35-201118476. 2. The second phase difference region is disposed in the second phase difference region between the front side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, and preferably adjusts the optical characteristics to help improve the contrast in the oblique direction and reduce the color shift in black display. shift. A preferred example of the second phase difference region satisfies 30 nm ^ Re(590) ^ 9 Onm, and 1 70 nm ^

Rth(590) S 300nm的相位差領域。在該範圍內時,可 減輕一般的VA型液晶胞(Δη£ΐ(590)爲180~350nm左右) 在黑顯示時的斜向方向的光漏。 再者,如前所述,第2相位差領域的遲滯値、特別是 Rth的較佳範圍係根據液晶層的Δη(1( λ )之値而變動。此 處,在波長λ的第1相位差領域之Rth設爲RthH又)、 第2相位差領域之Rth設爲Rth2( λ )時,對於液晶層的 AndU )及第1相位差領域的Rth( λ ),較佳的第2相位差 領域 之一例 係滿足 Δ nd(590)-70 ^Rth(590) S 300nm phase difference field. When it is in this range, it is possible to reduce the light leakage in the oblique direction in the case of black display when the general VA type liquid crystal cell (Δη£ΐ(590) is about 180 to 350 nm). Further, as described above, the hysteresis in the second phase difference region, particularly the preferred range of Rth, varies depending on the Δη (1 (λ) of the liquid crystal layer. Here, the first phase at the wavelength λ Rth in the difference domain is RthH), and Rth in the second phase difference region is Rth2 (λ), and the second phase difference is good for the liquid crystal layer AndU) and the first phase difference region Rth(λ). One example of the field satisfies Δ nd(590)-70 ^

Rthi(590) + Rth2(590) ^ Δηά(590)- 10 的相位差領域, 更佳係滿足 Δ nd(590)-60 ^ R t h ι ( 5 9 0 ) + R th 2 ( 5 9 0) ^ △ nd(590)-20的相位差領域。在該範圍內時,可更減輕VA 型液晶胞在黑顯示時的斜向方向的光漏。 另外,如上所述,爲了提高白顯示時的透過率(=提高 正面CR},液晶層的Δηί1(590)較佳爲280nm以上340nm 以下。該情形中,配置於前側之第2相位差領域係以 2 2 0 n m ^ Rth ( 5 9 0 ) = 2 8 0 n m -36- 201118476 爲佳, 2 3 Ο n m ^ Rth(590) ^ 2 8 Ο η m 爲更佳。 另一方面,考慮到製造適性時,有利用Rth(590) S 2 3 Onm的相位差薄膜之構成作爲第2相位差領域爲較宜的 情形。一般而言,爲了得到高相位差的相位差薄膜,必須 進行高延伸倍率的延伸處理、或增加有助於產生相位差之 添加劑的添加量,惟提高延伸倍率時,容易引起薄膜的切 斷,另外,添加劑的添加量變多時,是由於會有從薄膜滲 出添加劑之情形。 爲了利用R t h ( 5 9 0 ) S 2 3 Ο n m的相位差薄膜,液晶 胞的 Δη(1(590)係以 Δη(1(590) ^ 290nm 爲佳,And(590) ^ 280nm爲更佳。 第2相位差領域係可由一片的相位差薄膜所構成、亦 可爲2片以上的薄膜之積層體。另外,在滿足上述特性之 範圍內,對於其材料沒有特別地限制。各種的聚合物薄膜 係可利用例如醯化纖維素、聚碳酸酯系聚合物、聚對苯二 甲酸乙二酯或聚萘二甲酸乙二酯等的聚酯系聚合物、聚甲 基丙烯酸甲酯等的丙烯酸系聚合物、聚苯乙烯或丙烯腈. 苯乙烯共聚物(AS樹脂)等的苯乙烯系聚合物等。另外,可 使用從聚乙烯、聚丙烯等的聚烯烴、如乙烯.丙烯共聚物般 的聚烯烴系聚合物、氯乙烯系聚合物 '耐綸或芳香族聚醯 胺等的醯胺系聚合物、醯亞胺系聚合物、颯系聚合物、聚 醚颯系聚合物、聚醚醚酮系聚合物、聚苯硫醚系聚合物、 -37- 201118476 偏二氯乙烯系聚合物、乙烯醇系聚合物、乙烯基丁縮醛系 聚合物、芳酯系聚合物、聚氧甲烯系聚合物、環氧系聚合 物、或混合前述聚合物之聚合物等選擇i種或2種以上的 聚合物作爲主成分,以製作聚合物薄膜,以滿足上述特性 之組合’利用於製造構成有第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜。 作爲構成第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜,較佳係可使 用醯化纖維素系薄膜。可利用作爲構成第2相位差領域之 相位差薄膜的醯化纖維素系薄膜之原料,係以醯基取代度 爲2.00〜3.00爲佳。另外,薄膜係可進行延伸以調整成所 期望的遲滯値,惟從延伸時的遲滯値發現性之觀點,醯基 取代度低者爲佳。但是,由於醯基取代度越低,則未延伸 時的薄膜的Rth變得越高,所以作爲VA液晶顯示裝置的 相位差薄膜,係以醯基取代度爲 2.0 0 ~ 2.6 5爲佳, 2.20-2.65爲較佳,2.30~2.60爲更佳。另一方面,爲了 使相位差薄膜顯示逆波長分散性,醯基取代度高者爲佳, 具體而言,以 2.65~3.00爲佳,2.75~3.00爲較佳, 2.80~3.00 爲更佳。 另外,前述醯化纖維素係以乙酸纖維素爲佳,可取代 成乙醯基,或可同時以乙醯基及乙醯基以外的醯基取代。 其中,較佳係具有由乙醯基、丙醯基及丁醯基所選出之至 少一種醯基的醯化纖維素,及更佳係具有由乙醯基、丙醯 基及丁醯基所選出之至少二種醯基的醯化纖維素。再者, 以具有乙醯基、丙醯基及/或丁醯基之醯化纖維素爲佳,吏 佳係乙醯基的取代度爲1.〇~2_97,且丙醯基及/或丁醯基 -38- 201118476 的取代度爲0.2-2.5的醯化纖維素。 另外,前述醯化纖維素係具有200~800的質 合度爲佳,具有250~550的質量平均聚合度爲 外,在本發明所使用的醯化纖維素係具有70000 的數量平均分子量爲佳*具有75000~230000的 分子量爲較佳,具有78000~120000的數量平均 更佳。 雖然與可利用作爲構成上述第1相位差領域 薄膜的醯化纖維素之原料相同,但是,在使光學 性降低之化合物等、構成第1相位差領域之相位 的醯化纖維素系薄膜的製作中所使用的添加劑, 2相位差領域之相位差薄膜用醯化纖維素系薄膜 沒有使用爲佳。另一方面,在構成第2相位差領 差薄膜用醯化纖維素系薄膜的製作中,較佳係可 値表現劑作爲添加劑。作爲可使用的遲滯値表現 出由棒狀或圓盤狀化合物、正雙折射性化合物所 作爲前述棒狀或圓盤狀化合物,較佳係可使用具 種芳香族環之化合物作爲遲滯値表現劑。由前述 物所構.成之遲滯値表現劑的添加量係相對於含有 素之聚合物成分100質量份而言,以0.1-30質1 0.5-20質量份爲更佳。前述圓盤狀的遲滯値表現 於前述醯化纖維素樹脂1〇〇質量份而言,以在〇. 量份的範圍使用爲佳,在〇.1~15質量份的範圍 佳,在0.1~10質量份的範圍使用爲更佳。 前述圓盤狀化合物由於在Rth遲滯値發現性 述棒狀化合物要優異,所以在特大Rth遲滞値爲Rthi(590) + Rth2(590) ^ Δηά(590)-10 is a phase difference field, preferably Δ nd(590)-60 ^ R th ι ( 5 9 0 ) + R th 2 ( 5 9 0) ^ Δ nd (590)-20 phase difference field. When it is within this range, the light leakage of the VA type liquid crystal cell in the oblique direction at the time of black display can be further alleviated. Further, as described above, in order to increase the transmittance at the time of white display (=increasing the front surface CR}, Δηί1 (590) of the liquid crystal layer is preferably 280 nm or more and 340 nm or less. In this case, the second phase difference field disposed on the front side is 2 2 0 nm ^ Rth ( 5 9 0 ) = 2 80 0 -36- 201118476 is preferred, 2 3 Ο nm ^ Rth(590) ^ 2 8 Ο η m is better. On the other hand, considering manufacturing In the case of suitability, the phase difference film using Rth(590) S 2 3 Onm is preferably used as the second phase difference field. In general, in order to obtain a phase difference film having a high phase difference, high stretching ratio is required. The elongation treatment or the addition amount of the additive which contributes to the phase difference is increased, and when the stretching ratio is increased, the film is likely to be cut. Further, when the amount of the additive is increased, the additive is oozing out from the film. In order to utilize the phase difference film of R th ( 5 9 0 ) S 2 3 Ο nm, the Δη (1(590) of the liquid crystal cell is preferably Δη(1(590) ^ 290nm, And(590) ^ 280nm is more Preferably, the second phase difference field may be formed by one phase difference film or In addition, the material of the film is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above characteristics. Various polymer films may be, for example, deuterated cellulose, polycarbonate polymer, or poly pair. Polyester polymer such as ethylene phthalate or polyethylene naphthalate, acrylic polymer such as polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene or acrylonitrile. Styrene copolymer (AS resin) A styrene-based polymer, etc., and a polyolefin such as polyethylene or polypropylene, a polyolefin-based polymer such as an ethylene-propylene copolymer, or a vinyl chloride-based polymer can be used. Amidoxime polymer such as guanamine, quinone imine polymer, fluorene polymer, polyether fluorene polymer, polyetheretherketone polymer, polyphenylene sulfide polymer, -37-201118476 a dichloroethylene polymer, a vinyl alcohol polymer, a vinyl butyral polymer, an aryl ester polymer, a polyoxymethylene polymer, an epoxy polymer, or a polymer in which the polymer is mixed Select one or two or more types of polymerization As a main component, a polymer film is produced to satisfy a combination of the above characteristics, and it is used for producing a retardation film having a second phase difference. As a retardation film constituting the second phase difference, it is preferable to use 醯. The cellulose-based film can be used as a raw material of the fluorinated cellulose-based film constituting the retardation film in the second phase difference field, and the thiol substitution degree is preferably 2.00 to 3.00. Further, the film can be extended. Adjusted to the desired hysteresis, but from the point of view of the delay in the extension, the degree of substitution is lower. However, the lower the degree of substitution of the thiol group, the higher the Rth of the film when it is not extended. Therefore, the retardation film of the VA liquid crystal display device preferably has a thiol substitution degree of 2.0 0 to 2.6 5 , and 2.20 -2.65 is preferred, and 2.30~2.60 is preferred. On the other hand, in order to make the retardation film exhibit reverse wavelength dispersion, it is preferable that the thiol substitution degree is high. Specifically, 2.65 to 3.00 is preferable, 2.75 to 3.00 is preferable, and 2.80 to 3.00 is more preferable. Further, the cellulose deuterated cellulose is preferably cellulose acetate, and may be substituted with an ethyl hydrazine group or may be substituted with a fluorenyl group other than an ethyl hydrazine group or an ethyl fluorenyl group. Wherein, it is preferably a deuterated cellulose having at least one mercapto group selected from an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group, and more preferably having at least two selected from the group consisting of an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group. Sulfhydryl cellulose. Furthermore, it is preferred to use a fluorinated cellulose having an ethyl fluorenyl group, a propyl fluorenyl group and/or a butyl fluorenyl group, and the degree of substitution of the fluorene group is 1. 〇~2_97, and the propyl fluorenyl group and/or the butyl fluorenyl group-38- 201118476 has a degree of substitution of 0.2-2.5 deuterated cellulose. Further, the above-mentioned deuterated cellulose has a quality of 200 to 800, and has a mass average degree of polymerization of 250 to 550. The cellulose average used in the present invention has a number average molecular weight of 70,000. A molecular weight of 75,000 to 230,000 is preferred, and an average of 78,000 to 120,000 is preferable. In the same manner as the raw material of the deuterated cellulose which is used as the film for forming the first phase difference, the production of the deuterated cellulose film which constitutes the phase in the first phase difference region, such as a compound having reduced optical properties, can be used. The additive used in the second phase difference film in the phase difference region is preferably not used for the cellulose-based film. On the other hand, in the production of a fluorinated cellulose-based film for forming a second phase difference film, an enamel agent is preferred as an additive. As the hysteresis that can be used, a rod-like or discotic compound or a positive birefringent compound is used as the rod-like or disc-shaped compound, and it is preferable to use a compound of an aromatic ring as a hysteresis agent. . The amount of the hysteresis agent to be added is preferably from 0.1 to 30 mass%, more preferably from 0.5 to 30 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the polymer component of the cellulose. The disc-shaped hysteresis 値 is expressed in the range of 1 part by mass of the above-mentioned deuterated cellulose resin, preferably in the range of 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, in the range of 0.1 to 15 parts by mass. A range of 10 parts by mass is used more preferably. Since the disk-shaped compound is excellent in the discovery of a rod-like compound in the Rth retardation, the hysteresis of the large Rth is

量平均聚 更佳。另 -230000 數量平均 分子量爲 之相位差 的異方向 差薄膜用 在構成第 的製作中 域之相位 利用遲滯 劑,可舉 構成者。 有至少二 棒狀化合 醯化纖維 I份爲佳, 劑係相對 05-20 Μ 使用爲較 方面比前 必要之情 I -39- 201118476 形中可較佳使用。亦可倂用2種類以上的遲滯値表現劑。 前述遲滯値表現劑較佳係在250~400nm的波長領域 中具有最大吸收値,在可見光領域中實質上不具有吸收値 爲佳。 (1)圓盤狀化合物 就前述圓盤狀化合物加以説明。圓盤狀化合物係可使 用具有至少種芳香族環之化合物。 本說明書中,「芳香族環」係除了芳香族烴環,還包含 芳香族性雜環。作爲可使用於本發明之前述圓盤狀化合 物,可舉出例如記載於特開 2008-181105號公報的 [0038]~[0046]之化合物》 在構成第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜的製作中可利用 的前述圓盤狀化合物之例子中,含有下述一般式(I)所表 示之化合物。 X3 N人N … R2、,儿 A () X2〜Ν々χ1 R1 式中,XI係單鍵、1尺4-、_〇_或s-;X2係單鍵、_NR5_、 -Ο -或 S-; X3 係單鍵、-NR6-、-〇_或 s·。另外,Rl、R2、 及R3係各自獨立爲烷基、烯基、芳香族環基或雜環基;R4、 R5及R6係各自獨立爲氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基或雜環 基》 以下’係將前述一般式(I)所示之化合物的較佳例 (I-(1)~IV-(10))表示於下述’惟本發明係不受限於此等具 體例。 -40- 201118476The average amount is better. Further, -230000 is a phase difference film having an average number of molecular weights and a phase difference is used for forming the phase of the first production phase. The retarder is used as a constituent. It is preferable to have at least two rod-like bismuth fibers, and the agent is relatively more suitable than the use of 05-20 Μ in the case of I-39-201118476. Two or more types of hysteresis 値 expression agents can also be used. The retardation 値 expression agent preferably has a maximum absorption enthalpy in the wavelength range of 250 to 400 nm, and substantially no absorption 値 in the visible light field. (1) Discotic compound The discotic compound will be described. As the discotic compound, a compound having at least one aromatic ring can be used. In the present specification, the "aromatic ring" includes an aromatic heterocyclic ring in addition to the aromatic hydrocarbon ring. For example, the compound of the [0038] to [0046] described in JP-A-2008-181105, for example, can be used for the production of the retardation film in the second phase difference field. Examples of the above-mentioned discotic compound which can be used include the compound represented by the following general formula (I). X3 N人N ... R2, 儿A () X2~Ν々χ1 R1 where XI is a single bond, 1 ft 4-, _〇_ or s-; X2 is a single bond, _NR5_, -Ο - or S -; X3 is a single bond, -NR6-, -〇_ or s·. Further, each of R1, R2 and R3 is independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group; and R4, R5 and R6 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic ring. Preferred examples (I-(1) to IV-(10)) of the compound represented by the above general formula (I) are shown below. The invention is not limited to these specific examples. . -40- 201118476

1-(3)1-(3)

CH3 1-(5)CH3 1-(5)

1-(7)1-(7)

-41 201118476 1-(9) 1-(10)-41 201118476 1-(9) 1-(10)

COOCaHg 1-(11) 1-(12)COOCaHg 1-(11) 1-(12)

CH3 -42- 201118476 1-(17) 1-(18)CH3 -42- 201118476 1-(17) 1-(18)

NHNH

NHNH

-43- 201118476 1-(26)-43- 201118476 1-(26)

-44 - 201118476 I -(34)-44 - 201118476 I -(34)

-45- 201118476-45- 201118476

-46- 201118476 ΟΗ3Η〇-ΚτΝγ1^〇- ΝγΝ ΝΗ 6CH3 11-(2)-46- 201118476 ΟΗ3Η〇-ΚτΝγ1^〇- ΝγΝ ΝΗ 6CH3 11-(2)

II-⑷ 11-(3)II-(4) 11-(3)

-47- 201118476-47- 201118476

-48- 201118476 111-(1) 111-(2)-48- 201118476 111-(1) 111-(2)

-49- 201118476 111-(9)-49- 201118476 111-(9)

N^NN^N

ΝγΝΝγΝ

II卜(12) Q-9tntHh0 ΝγΝII Bu (12) Q-9tntHh0 ΝγΝ

NHNH

0CH3 -50- 201118476 IV — (1) IV-(2)0CH3 -50- 201118476 IV — (1) IV-(2)

IV-(3) IV-(4)IV-(3) IV-(4)

COOC^s IV-(5) IV-(6)COOC^s IV-(5) IV-(6)

IV-(9) IV-(10)IV-(9) IV-(10)

COOC^Is (2)棒狀化合物在本發明係除了前述的圓盤狀化合物以外,亦可適宜 使用具有直線的分子構造之棒狀化合物。作爲可使用於本 -51- 201118476 發明的前述棒狀化合物,可舉出例如記載於; 2007-268898號公報的[0053卜[0095]之化合物。 (3)正雙折射性化合物 所謂的正雙折射性化合物係指當光入射於分子採 軸性配向所形成之層時,前述配向方向的光之折射率 與前述配向方向成正交方向的光之折射率的聚合物。 作爲像這樣的正雙折射性化合物係沒有特別地限 可舉出聚醯胺、聚醯亞胺、聚酯、聚醚酮、聚醯胺醯 及聚酯醯亞胺等的固有雙折射値爲正的聚合物,以聚 及聚酯系聚合物等爲佳,聚酯系聚合物爲更佳。 前述聚酯系聚合物係藉由碳數2~20的脂肪族二 和碳數8~20的芳香族二羧酸之混合物,與由碳數‘‘ 的脂肪族二醇、碳數4~20的烷基醚二醇及碳數6~20 香族二醇所選出之至少1種類以上之二醇的反應而得 且反應物的兩末端係可反應物直接、或進而與單羧酸 一元醇類或酚類反應,亦可實施所謂末端的封止。該 封止由於特別是不含有自由的羧酸類而實施的,從保 等的點而言爲有效的。使用本發明的聚酯系聚合物之 酸較佳爲碳數4~20的脂肪族二羧酸殘基或碳數8~20 香族二羧酸殘基》 作爲較佳使用的碳數2~20的脂肪族二羧酸,可 例如草酸、丙二酸、琥珀酸、馬來酸、富馬酸、戊二 己二酸、庚二酸、辛二酸、壬二酸、癸二酸、十二烷 酸及1,4-環己烷二羧酸。 開 取單 大於 制 亞胺 醚酮 羧酸 1 2 的芳 到, 類或 末端 存性 二羧 的芳 舉出 酸、 二羧 -52- 201118476 另外,作爲碳數8~20的芳香族二羧酸係有苯二甲酸、 對苯二甲酸、間苯二甲酸、1,5-萘二羧酸、1,4-萘二羧酸、 1,8-萘二羧酸、2,8-萘二羧酸及2,6-萘二羧酸等。 此等之中,作爲較佳的脂肪族二羧酸係有丙二酸 '琥 珀酸、馬來酸、富馬酸、戊二酸、己二酸、壬二酸、1,4-環己烷二羧酸,做爲芳香族二羧酸係有苯二甲酸、對苯二 甲酸、間苯二甲酸、1,5 -萘二羧酸、1,4 -萘二羧酸》特佳 係脂肪族二羧酸成分爲琥珀酸、戊二酸、己二酸,芳香族 二羧酸爲苯二甲酸、對苯二甲酸、間苯二甲酸。 可沒有特別地限制地組合使用前述脂肪族二羧酸與芳 香族二羧酸的各至少一種類、或其組合,且組合數種種類 的各成分也沒有問題。 前述正雙折射性化合物中所利用之二醇或芳香族環含 有二醇’係可由例如碳數2~20的脂肪族二醇、碳數4~20 的烷基醚二醇及碳數6~20的芳香族環含有二醇所選出者。 作爲碳原子2~20的脂肪族二醇係可舉例烷基二醇及 脂環式二醇類,例如:乙二醇' 12-丙二醇、i,3 -丙二醇、 1,2-丁 二醇、ι,3-丁 二醇、2-甲基-1,3-丙二醇、1,4-丁二 醇、1,5-戊二醇、2,2-二甲基-1,3-丙二醇(新戊二醇)、2,2-二乙基-1,3-丙二醇(3,3_二羥甲基戊烷)、2-正丁基-2-乙基 -1,3-丙二醇(3,3-二羥甲基庚烷)、3_甲基-1,5_戊二醇、 1,6 -己二醇' 2,2,4 -三甲基-1,3 -戊二醇、2 -乙基-1,3 -己 二醇、2-甲基- i,8_辛二醇、19 —壬二醇、^(^癸二醇、 1,12-十八二醇等,此等的二醇係可爲【種或2種以上的 [S] -53- 201118476 混合物而使用。 作爲較佳的脂肪族二醇係有乙二醇、1,2 -丙二醇、1,3-丙二醇、1,2-丁 二醇、1,3-丁 二醇、2-甲基-1,3-丙二醇、 1,4-丁 二醇、1,5-戊二醇、3-甲基-1,5·戊二醇、1,6-己二 醇、1,4 -環己二醇、1,4 -環己烷二甲醇,特佳係乙二醇、 1,2-丙二醇、1,3-丙二醇、1,2-丁 二醇、1,3-丁 二醇、1,4-丁 二醇、1,5-戊二醇、1,6-己二醇、1,4-環己二醇、1,4-環己烷二甲醇。 作爲碳數4~20的烷基醚二醇,較佳係可舉例如聚四 亞甲基醚二醇、聚乙烯醚二醇及聚丙烯醚二醇以及此等之 組合。其平均聚合度係沒有特別地限制,較宜爲2 ~ 2 0,較 佳爲2~10,更佳爲2~5,特佳係2~4。作爲此等的例子係 可舉例如卡波瓦庫斯(Carbowax)樹脂、普路樂尼庫斯 (Pluronics)樹脂及尼阿庫斯(Niax)樹脂,作爲代表性有用 的市售聚醚二醇類。 作爲碳數6-20的芳香族二醇係沒有特別地限定,可 舉出雙酚A' 1,2-羥基苯、1,3-羥基苯、1,4-羥基苯、1,4-苯二甲醇,較佳係雙酚A、1,4·羥基苯、1,4-苯二甲醇。 前述正雙折射性化合物較佳係末端爲烷基或是芳香族 基所封止之化合物。其係藉由利用疏水性官能基以保護末 端,對於在高溫高濕下的經時劣化爲有效,且成爲顯示延 遲水解酯基的角色之主要原因。 爲了使前述正雙折射性化合物的兩末端不成爲羧酸、 OH基,較佳係以一元醇殘基、單羧酸殘基進行保護。 -54- 201118476 該情形下,作爲一元醇係以碳數1~30的取代、無取 代之一元醇爲佳,可舉出甲醇、乙醇、丙醇、異丙醇、丁 醇、異丁醇、戊醇、異戊醇、己醇、異己醇、環己醇、辛 醇、異辛醇、2-乙基己醇、壬醇、異壬醇、第三壬醇、癸 醇、十二烷醇、十二烷己醇、十二烷辛醇、烯丙醇、油醇 等的脂肪族醇、苄醇、3-苯基丙醇等的取代醇等。 較佳使用的末端封止用醇係有甲醇、乙醇、丙醇、里^ 丙醇、丁醇、異丁醇、異戊醇、己醇、異己醇、環己醇、 異辛醇、2 -乙基己醇、異壬醇、油醇、苄醇,特佳係甲醇、 乙醇、丙醇、異丁醇、環己醇、2-乙基己醇' 異壬醇、〒: 醇。 另外,以單羧酸殘基進行封止之'情形,作爲單翔酸殘 基所使用之單羧酸較佳係碳數1~30的取代、無取代之單 羧酸。此等係可爲脂肪族單羧酸、亦可爲含有芳香族環之 羧酸。就較佳的脂肪族單羧酸記述時,可舉出乙酸、丙酸、 丁酸、辛酸、己酸、癸酸、十二烷酸、硬脂酸、油酸,作 爲含有芳香族環之單羧酸係有例如安息香酸、p-第三丁基 安息香酸、P -第三戊基安息香酸、原苯乙酸、間苯乙酸、 對苯乙酸 '二甲基安息香酸、乙基安息香酸、正丙基安息 香酸、胺基安息香酸、乙醢氧基安息香酸等,此等係可分 別使用1種或2種以上^ 前述正雙折射性化合物的合成係可藉由常用方法,使 上述二羧酸與二醇及/或末端封止用的單羧酸或一元醇之 聚酯化反應或酯交換反應的熱熔融縮合法,或是藉由此等 [S] -55- 201118476 酸的醯氯與二醇類之界面縮合法的任一方法,而輕易合成 得到。關於此等之聚酯系添加劑係在村井孝一編者「添加 劑其理論與應用」(幸書房股份有限公司、昭和48年3 月1日初版第1版發行)中有詳細的記載。另外,亦可利用 特開平05- 1 55809號、特開平05-155810號、特開平 5-197073 號、特開 2006-259494 號、特開平 07-330670 號、特開2006-342227號、特開2007-00367 9號各公報 等中所記載的素材。 以下,記載前述正雙折射性化合物的具體例,惟本發 明中可使用的正雙折射性化合物係不限定於此等。 -56- 201118476 [表1】 二羧酸 二醇 芳香族二 羧酸 脂肪族二 羧酸 羧酸比 (莫耳%) 脂肪族 二醇 末端 數量平均 分子量 P-1 — AA 100 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-2 — AA 100 乙二醇 羥基 2000 P-3 — AA 100 丙二醇 羥基 2000 P-4 — AA 100 丁二醇 羥基 2000 P-5 — AA 100 己二醇 羥基 2000 P-6 — AA/SA 60/40 乙二醇 羥基 900 P-7 — AA/SA 60/40 乙二醇 羥基 1500 P-8 — AA/SA 60/40 乙二醇 羥基 1800 P-9 — SA 100 乙二醇 羥基 1500 P-10 — SA 100 乙二醇 羥基 2300 P-11 — SA 100 乙二醇 羥基 6000 P-12 — SA 100 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-13 PA SA 50/50 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-14 PA SA 50/50 乙二醇 羥基 1800 P-15 PA SA 50/50 乙二醇 羥基 2300 P-16 PA SA/AA 40/30/30 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-17 PA SA/AA 50/20/30 乙二醇 羥基 1500 P-18 PA SA/AA 50/20/30 乙二醇 羥基 2600 P-19 TPA SA 50/50 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-20 TPA SA 50/50 乙二醇 羥基 1200 P-21 TPA AA 50/50 乙二醇 羥基 2100 P-22 TPA SA/AA 40/30/30 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-23 TPA SA/AA 50/20/30 乙二醇 羥基 1500 P-24 TPA SA/AA 50/20/30 乙二醇 羥基 2100 P-25 PA/TPA AA 15/35/50 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-26 PA/TPA AA 20/30/50 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-27 PA/TPA SA/AA 15/35/20/30 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-28 PA/TPA SA/AA 20/30/20/30 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-29 PA/TPA SA/AA 10/50/30/10 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-30 PA/TPA SA/AA 5/45/30/20 乙二醇 羥基 1000 P-31 — AA 100 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-32 — AA 100 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-33 — AA 100 丙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-34 — AA 100 丁二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-35 — AA 100 己二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-36 — AA/SA 60/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 900 -57- 201118476 [表2] 二羧酸 二醇 芳香族二 羧酸 脂肪族二 羧酸 羧酸比 (莫耳%) 脂肪族 二醇 末端 數量平均 /' 7县 J Μ P-37 — AA/SA 60/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-38 — AA/SA 60/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-39 — SA 100 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-40 一 SA 100 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 3000 P-41 — SA 100 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 5500 P-42 — SA 100 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-43 PA SA 50/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-44 PA SA 50/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1500 P-45 PA AA 50/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-46 PA SA/AA 40/30/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-47 PA SA/AA 33/33/34 乙二醇 安息香酸 1000 P-48 PA SA/AA 50/20/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1500 P-49 PA SA/AA 50/30/20 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-50 TPA SA 50/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-51 TPA SA 50/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1500 P-52 TPA SA 45/55 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-53 TPA AA 50/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2200 P-54 TPA SA 35/65 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-55 TPA SA/AA 40/30/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-56 TPA SA/AA 50/20/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1500 P-57 TPA SA/AA 50/30/20 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 2000 P-58 TPA SA/AA 20/20/60 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-59 PA/TPA AA 15/35/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-60 PA/TPA AA 25/25/50 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-61 PA/TPA SA/AA 15/35/20/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-62 PA/TPA SA/AA 20/30/20/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-63 PA/TPA SA/AA 10/50/30/10 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-64 PA/TPA SA/AA 5/45/30/20 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-65 PA/TPA SA/AA 5/45/20/30 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-66 IPA AA/SA 20/40/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1000 P-67 2,6-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1200 P-68 1,5-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1200 P-69 1,4-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1200 P-70 1,8-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1200 P-71 2,8-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 乙二醇 乙醯酯殘基 1200 -58- 201118476 表1及表2中,PA分別表示苯二甲酸,TPA分別表示 對苯二甲酸,I Ρ Α分別表示間苯二甲酸,ΑΑ分別表示己二 酸,8八分別表示琥珀酸,2,61?六分別表示2,6-萘二羧 酸,2,8-NPA分別表示2,8-萘二羧酸,1,5-NPA分別表示 1,5-萘二羧酸,1,4-NPA分別表示1,4-萘二羧酸,1,8-NPA 分別表示1,8 -萘二羧酸。 像這樣的前述正雙折射性化合物的添加量係相對於醯 化纖維素樹脂100質量份而言,以1~30質量份爲佳,4~25 質量份爲較佳,10~20質量份爲特佳。 在前述醯化纖維素系薄膜的製作中所使用的醯化纖維 素溶液中,除了前述遲滯値表現劑以外,亦可具有其他的 添加劑。作爲其他的添加劑係可舉出抗氧化劑、紫外線吸 收劑、剝離促進劑、可塑劑等,無論哪一者均可使用眾所 周知的添加劑。 爲了改良所得薄膜的機械性物性、或提昇乾燥速度, 可在前述醯化纖維素溶液中添加可塑劑。作爲本發明中可 使用之前述可塑劑,可舉出例如於特開2008-181105號 公報的[0067]中所記載之化合物。 另外’作爲構成第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜,較佳 係使用環狀烯烴系聚合物薄膜者。關於該環狀烯烴系聚合 物薄膜的原料及其製造方法、以及使用該原料之薄膜的製 造方法,在特開 2006-293342號公報的[0098】~[0193] 中有詳細的記載’在本發明可加以參照。在可利用作爲構 成第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜的環狀烯烴系聚合物薄膜 -59- 201118476 之例子中,包含降萡烯系聚合物薄膜,市售的聚合物方面 係可使用ARTON(JSR製)、ZERONOR(日本ΖΕΟΝ製)等。 作爲構成第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜所使用的各種 聚合物薄膜係可用各種的方法來製造。可舉出例如溶液澆 鑄法(溶液流延法)、熔融擠壓法、壓延法、壓縮成形法等。 此等的薄膜成形方法之中,特佳爲溶液澆鑄法(溶液流延 法)、熔融擠壓法。另外,利用作爲構成第2相位差領域之 相位差薄膜的各種聚合物薄膜係可爲在成形之後,經由延 伸處理所製造的薄膜。薄膜的延伸係可爲1軸延伸、亦可 爲2軸延伸。較佳係同時或是逐次進行2軸延伸處理。爲 了達成大光學異方向性,必須用高延伸倍率延伸薄膜。例 如,較佳係朝薄膜的寬度方向、及薄膜的縱向方向(流動方 向)進行延伸。延伸倍率係以3~ 100%左右爲佳。延伸處理 係可使用拉幅機而實施。另外,亦可在軋輥間進行縱向延 伸。 亦可使用共流延法、逐次流延法、塗布法等的積層流 延法以作爲前述溶液澆鑄法。利用共流延法及逐次流延法 製造之情形中,首先調製各層用的醯化纖維素溶液(塗布 液)。共流延法(多層同時流延)係在流延用支持體(皮帶或滾 筒)之上,從由另外的狹縫等同時壓出各層(可爲3層或是 其以上)各自的流延用塗布液之流延用噴嘴來壓出塗布 液’各層同時流延、於適當的時期自支持體上剝離、乾燥, 以形成薄膜之流延法。 逐次流延法係以首先在流延用支持體之上,自流延用 -60- 201118476 噴嘴壓出、流延第1層用的流延用塗布液,乾燥或是不乾 燥’於其上自流延用噴嘴壓出第2層用的流延用塗布液爲 進行流延之要點,如果必要可逐次流延.積層塗布液至第3 層以上’於適當的時期自支持體剝離、乾燥,以成形薄膜 之流延法。 一般而言,塗布法係利用溶液製膜法使芯層的薄膜成 形爲薄膜,調製塗布於表層的塗布液,使用適當的塗布機, 在各單面或兩面上同時塗布,乾燥塗布液成薄膜,以成形積 層構造之薄膜的方法。 另外,構成第2相位差領域之相位差薄膜亦可在將液 晶組成物形成所期望的配向狀態之後,固定其配向狀態所 形成之層,或亦可爲同時具有該層以及支持該層之聚合物 薄膜的積層體。在後者之態樣,亦可利用該聚合物薄膜作 爲偏光子的保護薄膜。在構成第2相位差領域之相位差薄 膜的製作中可以利用的液晶之例子中,包含有棒狀液晶、 圓盤狀液晶、膽甾醇液晶等各種的液晶。 爲了得到更高的正面CR,構成配置於前側之第2相位 差領域之相位差薄膜的霧度爲0.5以下爲佳,0.3以下爲 較佳,0.2以下爲更佳。 爲了抑制角落不均,必須減小因落在相位差薄膜上的 應力所致的相位差薄膜變形。從抑制角落不均及製造適性 的觀點而言,構成配置於前側之第2相位差領域的相位差 薄膜的膜厚爲20/zm以上、200;am以下爲佳。 3.偏光子 [S] -61 - 201118476 關於配置於前側及後側之偏光子係沒有特別地限制。 可利用通常所使用的直線偏光膜。直線偏光膜係較佳爲以 Op tivalnc.爲代表的塗布型偏光膜、或由黏結劑與碘或二 色性色素所構成之偏光膜。在直線偏光膜中的碘及二色性 色素係在黏結劑中配向而發現偏光性能。碘及二色性色素 較佳係沿著黏結劑分子配向,或藉由使二色性色素如液晶 般自己組織化而朝單一方向配向。現在市售的偏光子一般 係將經延伸之聚合物在浴槽中浸漬於碘或二色性色素的溶 液中,並在黏結劑中使碘、或二色性色素浸透至黏結劑中 而製作的。 4.保護薄膜 在前側偏光子及後側偏光子的各自兩面上,貼合保護 薄膜爲佳。但是,如圖1所示,第1及第2相位差領域係 由1片的薄膜所構成的,在該薄膜亦具有作爲保護薄膜之 功能的態樣中,在液晶胞側的偏光子表面可省略保護薄 膜。在後側偏光子與液晶胞之間配置有保護薄膜及1片以 上的相位差薄膜之態樣中,該保護薄膜與1片以上的相位 差薄膜係作爲積層體全體,且滿足於第1相位差領域所要 求之光學特性。關於該保護薄膜的較佳材料等係與構成第 1相位差領域之相位差薄膜的較佳材料等相同。 在前側偏光子與液晶胞之間配置有保護薄膜及1片以 上的相位差薄膜之態樣中,較佳係該保護薄膜與1片以上 的相位差薄膜作爲積層體全體,並滿足於第2相位差領域 所要求之光學特性。保護薄膜係與1片以上的相位差薄膜 -62- 201118476 一起具有有助於提昇斜向方向的對比,及減輕黑顯示時的 色偏移之作用,亦即也可以爲顯示某程度的Re及Rth之 相位差薄膜。 關於配置於前側偏光子及後側偏光子外側之保護薄膜 係沒有特別地限制。可使用各種的聚合物薄膜。可與構成 上述第1相位差領域之相位差薄膜的例子相同。可舉出例 如以醯化纖維素類(例如乙酸纖維素、丙酸纖維素、丁酸纖 維素等的薄膜)、聚烯烴(例如降萡烯系聚合物、聚丙烯}、 聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯(例如聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯)、聚碳酸酯、聚 酯、或聚颯爲主成分之薄膜等,惟不限定於此等。亦可使 用市售的聚合物薄膜(在醯化纖維素類方面爲「TD80UL」 (富士軟片公司製),在降萡烯系聚合物方面爲ARTON(JSR 製)、ZEONOR(日本 ΖΕΟΝ 製)等)。 實施例 以下,列舉實施例以進一步具體說明本發明。以下的 實施例中所示之材料、試藥、物質量及其比例、操作等, 只要在不脫離本發明的主要內容之範圍,可適宜變更。因 此,本發明的範圍係不限制於以下的具體例。 1 .薄膜1 ~ 6的製作 調製記載於下述表之醯基的種類、取代度不同的醯化 纖維素。其係添加硫酸(相對於纖維素100質量份而言爲 7.8質量份)作爲觸媒,添加爲醯基取代基原料之羧酸並在 40 °C下進行醯化反應。此時,調整羧酸的種類、量,節以 調整醯基的種類、取代度。又,醯化後在40 °C進行熟成。 -63- 201118476 再者,用丙酮洗淨去除該醯化纖維素的低分子量成分。另 外,表中所謂的Ac係意味著乙醯基,所謂的CTA係意味 著三乙酸纖維素(醯基僅由乙酸酯基所構成之纖維素酯衍 生物)。 (醯化纖維素溶液) 將下述組成物投入混合槽內,攪拌且溶解各成分,再 在9 0°C中加熱約10分鐘之後,用平均孔徑34 μιη的濾紙 及平均孔徑10# m的煅燒金屬過濾器加以過濾。 醯化纖維素溶液 醯化纖維素 1 0 0 · 0質量份 磷酸三苯酯(TPP} 7.8質量份 磷酸聯苯基二苯酯(BDP) 3.9質量份 二氯甲烷 4 0 3.0質量份 甲醇 60.2質量份 (消光劑分散液) 接著,將含有在上述方法中所調製之醯化纖維素溶液 的下述組成物投入分散機中,以調製消光劑分散液。 -64- 201118476 消光劑分散液 平均粒徑16nm的矽石粒子 (Aerosol R972 日本 A E R Ο SIL (股)製)2.0 質量份 二氯甲烷 7 2.4質量份 甲醇 1 0.8質量份 醯化纖維素溶液 1 〇 . 3質量份 {添加劑溶液) 接著,將含有在上述方法中所調製之醯化纖維素溶液 的下述組成物投入混合槽內,一 邊加熱、一邊攪拌溶解, 以調製添加劑溶液。 添加劑溶液 遲滞値表現劑(1) 2〇.〇質量份 二氯甲院 58.3質量份 甲醇 8.7質量份 醯化纖維素溶液 1 2.8質量份 混合上述醯化纖維素溶液爲 1〇〇質量份、消光劑分散 液爲1.35質量份、進而醯化纖維素系薄膜中的遲滞値表現 劑(1)的添加量爲10質量份之量的添加劑溶液,以調製製 -65- 201118476 膜用塗布液。添加劑的添加比例係表示醯化纖維素量胃f乍 100質量份時的質量份》 變更記載於下述表的綿、添加劑,以調製上述的溶液 及分散液。 此處,記載於下述表中的添加劑及可塑劑的略稱係如 下所述。 CTA :三乙醯纖維素 TPP :磷酸三苯酯 BDP:磷酸聯苯基二苯酯 遲滯値表現劑(1 )COOC^Is (2) Rod-like compound In the present invention, in addition to the above-described disc-shaped compound, a rod-like compound having a linear molecular structure may be suitably used. The rod-like compound which can be used in the invention of the present invention is, for example, the compound of [0053] [0095] described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2007-268898. (3) Positive birefringent compound The so-called positive birefringent compound is a light in which the refractive index of the light in the alignment direction is orthogonal to the alignment direction when light is incident on a layer formed by the axial alignment of the molecules. The refractive index of the polymer. The positive birefringence compound as described above is not particularly limited to an inherent birefringence enthalpy of polyamine, polyimide, polyester, polyether ketone, polyamidoxime, and polyester quinone. The positive polymer is preferably a poly-based polyester polymer or the like, and a polyester-based polymer is more preferable. The polyester-based polymer is a mixture of an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid having 2 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 8 to 20 carbon atoms, and an aliphatic diol having a carbon number of '' and a carbon number of 4 to 20 Reaction of at least one type of diol selected from the group consisting of alkyl ether diols and carbon number 6-20 diols, and both ends of the reactants are reactants directly or in combination with monocarboxylic acid monohydric alcohols For the reaction of a class or a phenol, a so-called terminal blocking can also be carried out. This sealing is carried out because it does not contain a free carboxylic acid in particular, and is effective from the point of conservation. The acid using the polyester-based polymer of the present invention is preferably an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid residue having 4 to 20 carbon atoms or a residue having 8 to 20 carbon atoms and a dicarboxylic acid residue as a preferred carbon number 2~ 20 aliphatic dicarboxylic acid, such as oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, pimelic acid, suberic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, ten Dialkyl acid and 1,4-cyclohexane dicarboxylic acid. The aromatic extract is larger than the aromatic amine carboxylic acid 1 2 , the aromatic or dicarboxylic acid of the terminal or the terminal dicarboxylic acid, the dicarboxylic acid -52- 201118476, and the aromatic dicarboxylic acid having a carbon number of 8-20 Are phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, 1,8-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, 2,8-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid Acid and 2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid and the like. Among these, preferred aliphatic dicarboxylic acids are malonic acid 'succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, and 1,4-cyclohexane. Dicarboxylic acid, as aromatic dicarboxylic acid, phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, especially good aliphatic The dicarboxylic acid component is succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, and the aromatic dicarboxylic acid is phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and isophthalic acid. At least one of the above-mentioned aliphatic dicarboxylic acid and aromatic dicarboxylic acid, or a combination thereof, may be used in combination without particular limitation, and there is no problem in combining several kinds of components. The diol or aromatic ring-containing diol used in the above-mentioned positively birefringent compound may be, for example, an aliphatic diol having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkyl ether diol having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 6~. The aromatic ring of 20 contains the diol selected. Examples of the aliphatic diol having 2 to 20 carbon atoms include alkyl diols and alicyclic diols, for example, ethylene glycol ' 12-propylene glycol, i, 3-propylene glycol, 1,2-butanediol, I,3-butanediol, 2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 2,2-dimethyl-1,3-propanediol (new Pentanediol), 2,2-diethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dihydroxymethylpentane), 2-n-butyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol (3, 3-dimethylol heptane), 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol '2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol, 2 -ethyl-1,3-hexanediol, 2-methyl-i,8-octanediol, 19-nonanediol, ^(癸癸diol, 1,12-octadecanediol, etc., etc. The diol system may be used as a mixture of two or more kinds of [S]-53-201118476. Preferred aliphatic diols are ethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, and 1,3-propanediol. 1,2-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 3-methyl-1, 5. pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, especially ethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3- Glycol, 1,2-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexane The alcohol and 1,4-cyclohexane dimethanol. The alkyl ether diol having 4 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably, for example, polytetramethylene ether glycol, polyvinyl ether glycol or polypropylene ether. The alcohol and the combination thereof are not particularly limited, and are preferably 2 to 20, preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 5, and particularly preferably 2 to 4. Examples include, for example, Carbowax resin, Pluronics resin, and Niax resin, which are representative and useful commercially available polyether diols. The aromatic diols of 6 to 20 are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include bisphenol A' 1,2-hydroxybenzene, 1,3-hydroxybenzene, 1,4-hydroxybenzene, and 1,4-benzenedimethanol. Preferably, it is bisphenol A, 1,4-hydroxybenzene, and 1,4-benzenedimethanol. The above-mentioned positive birefringent compound is preferably a compound in which the terminal is an alkyl group or an aromatic group is blocked. By using a hydrophobic functional group to protect the end, there is a deterioration over time under high temperature and high humidity. Further, it is a cause of exhibiting a role of delaying the hydrolysis of the ester group. In order to prevent the both ends of the above-mentioned positive birefringent compound from being a carboxylic acid or an OH group, it is preferably protected with a monohydric alcohol residue or a monocarboxylic acid residue. -54- 201118476 In this case, the monohydric alcohol is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted monohydric alcohol having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, and isobutanol. Pentanol, isoamyl alcohol, hexanol, isohexanol, cyclohexanol, octanol, isooctanol, 2-ethylhexanol, decyl alcohol, isodecyl alcohol, third sterol, decyl alcohol, dodecanol An aliphatic alcohol such as dodecyl hexanol, dodecyl octanol, allyl alcohol or oleyl alcohol, a substituted alcohol such as benzyl alcohol or 3-phenylpropanol, or the like. Preferred terminal blocking alcohols are methanol, ethanol, propanol, propylene glycol, butanol, isobutanol, isoamyl alcohol, hexanol, isohexanol, cyclohexanol, isooctanol, 2 - Ethylhexanol, isodecyl alcohol, oleyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, particularly preferred are methanol, ethanol, propanol, isobutanol, cyclohexanol, 2-ethylhexanol 'isodecyl alcohol, hydrazine: alcohol. Further, in the case of blocking with a monocarboxylic acid residue, the monocarboxylic acid used as the mono-acid residue is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted monocarboxylic acid having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. These may be aliphatic monocarboxylic acids or carboxylic acids containing aromatic rings. When a preferred aliphatic monocarboxylic acid is described, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, caprylic acid, caproic acid, capric acid, dodecanoic acid, stearic acid, or oleic acid may be mentioned as a single ring containing an aromatic ring. The carboxylic acid is, for example, benzoic acid, p-t-butylbenzoic acid, P-third amyl benzoic acid, phenylacetic acid, m-phenylacetic acid, p-phenylacetic acid 'dimethyl benzoic acid, ethyl benzoic acid, positive a propyl benzoic acid, an amino benzoic acid, an ethoxylated benzoic acid, or the like, which may be used alone or in combination of two or more of the above-mentioned positive birefringent compounds. The above dicarboxylic acid can be obtained by a usual method. a hot melt condensation method for the polyesterification reaction or transesterification reaction of an acid with a diol and/or a terminally blocked monocarboxylic acid or a monohydric alcohol, or a ruthenium chloride by such [S] -55-201118476 acid Any method of interfacial condensation with a diol is easily synthesized. The polyester-based additives are described in detail in the editor of Takashi Murata, "The Theory and Application of Additives" (Kyosuke Co., Ltd., the first edition of the first edition of the March 1, 2008 show). In addition, it is also possible to use the special opening No. 05- 1 55809, the special Kaiping 05-155810, the special Kaikai 5-117073, the special opening 2006-259494, the special Kaiping 07-330670, the special opening 2006-342227, and the special opening. 2007-00367 The materials described in each of the bulletins and the like. Specific examples of the above-mentioned positive birefringence compound are described below, but the positive birefringence compound which can be used in the present invention is not limited thereto. -56- 201118476 [Table 1] Dicarboxylic acid diol aromatic dicarboxylic acid aliphatic dicarboxylic acid carboxylic acid ratio (mol%) aliphatic diol terminal number average molecular weight P-1 - AA 100 ethylene glycol hydroxy 1000 P-2 — AA 100 Glycol Hydroxy 2000 P-3 — AA 100 Propylene Glycol Hydrolium 2000 P-4 — AA 100 Butanediol Hydroxy 2000 P-5 — AA 100 Hexanediol Hydroxy 2000 P-6 — AA/SA 60 /40 Glycol Hydroxy 900 P-7 — AA/SA 60/40 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 1500 P-8 — AA/SA 60/40 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 1800 P-9 — SA 100 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 1500 P- 10 — SA 100 Ethylene glycol hydroxy 2300 P-11 — SA 100 Ethylene glycol hydroxy 6000 P-12 — SA 100 Ethylene glycol hydroxy 1000 P-13 PA SA 50/50 Ethylene glycol hydroxy 1000 P-14 PA SA 50 /50 glycol hydroxy 1800 P-15 PA SA 50/50 glycol hydroxy 2300 P-16 PA SA/AA 40/30/30 glycol hydroxy 1000 P-17 PA SA/AA 50/20/30 B Glycol Hydroxy 1500 P-18 PA SA/AA 50/20/30 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 2600 P-19 TPA SA 50/50 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-20 TPA SA 50/50 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 1200 P-21 TPA AA 50/50 glycolic hydroxyl 2100 P-22 TPA SA/AA 40/30/30 Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-23 TPA SA/AA 50/20/30 Glycol Hydroxy 1500 P-24 TPA SA/AA 50/20/30 Ethylene Glycol Hydroxy 2100 P-25 PA/TPA AA 15/35/50 Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-26 PA/TPA AA 20/30/50 Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-27 PA/TPA SA/AA 15/35/20 /30 Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-28 PA/TPA SA/AA 20/30/20/30 Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-29 PA/TPA SA/AA 10/50/30/10 Ethylene Glycol 1000 P -30 PA/TPA SA/AA 5/45/30/20 Glycol Hydroxy 1000 P-31 — AA 100 Ethylene Glycolate Residue 1000 P-32 — AA 100 Ethylene Glycolate Residue 2000 P-33 — AA 100 Propylene Glycolate Residue 2000 P-34 — AA 100 Butanediol Ethyl Ester Residue 2000 P-35 — AA 100 Hexanediol Ethyl Ester Residue 2000 P-36 — AA/SA 60/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 900 -57- 201118476 [Table 2] Dicarboxylic acid diol aromatic dicarboxylic acid aliphatic dicarboxylic acid carboxylic acid ratio (mol%) Average number of aliphatic diol ends /' 7 County J Μ P-37 — AA/SA 60/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-38 — AA/SA 60/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 2000 P-39 — SA 100 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-40 One SA 100 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 3000 P-41 — SA 100 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 5500 P-42 — SA 100 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-43 PA SA 50/50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-44 PA SA 50/50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1500 P-45 PA AA 50 /50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 2000 P-46 PA SA/AA 40/30/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-47 PA SA/AA 33/33/34 Ethylene glycol benzoic acid 1000 P-48 PA SA/AA 50/20/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1500 P-49 PA SA/AA 50/30/20 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 2000 P-50 TPA SA 50/50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-51 TPA SA 50/50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1500 P-52 TPA SA 45/55 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-53 TPA AA 50/ 50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 2200 P-54 TPA SA 35/65 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-55 TPA SA/AA 40/30/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P- 56 TPA SA/AA 50/20/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1500 P-57 TPA SA/AA 50/30/20 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 2000 P-58 TPA SA/AA 20/20 /60 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-59 PA/TPA AA 15/35/50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-60 PA/TPA AA 25/25/50 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-61 PA/TPA SA/AA 15/35/20/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-62 PA/TPA SA/AA 20/30/20/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-63 PA/TPA SA/AA 10/50/30/10 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-64 PA/TPA SA/AA 5/45/30/20 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-65 PA/TPA SA/AA 5/45/20/30 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-66 IPA AA/SA 20/40/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1000 P-67 2,6-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1200 P-68 1,5-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1200 P-69 1,4-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 ethylene glycol oxime residue 1200 P-70 1,8-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 ethylene glycol oxime residue 1200 P-71 2,8-NPA AA/SA 20/40/40 Ethylene glycol acetate residue 1200 -58- 201118476 In Tables 1 and 2, PA represents phthalic acid, respectively, and TPA represents terephthalic acid, I Ρ Α denotes isophthalic acid, ΑΑ denotes adipic acid, respectively, 8 8 denotes succinic acid, 2, 61 ?6 denotes 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,8-NPA denotes 2,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, respectively, and 1,5-NPA denotes 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-NPA, respectively Each represents 1,4-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, and 1,8-NPA represents 1,8-naphthalene dicarboxylic acid, respectively. The amount of the above-mentioned positively birefringent compound added is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 4 to 25 parts by mass, and 10 to 20 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the deuterated cellulose resin. Very good. The deuterated cellulose solution used in the production of the above-described deuterated cellulose-based film may have other additives in addition to the hysteresis agent. Examples of the other additives include an antioxidant, an ultraviolet absorber, a peeling accelerator, a plasticizer, and the like, and any of them can be used as well. In order to improve the mechanical properties of the obtained film or to increase the drying speed, a plasticizer may be added to the aforementioned cellulose oxide solution. The compound described in [0067] of JP-A-2008-181105 is exemplified as the above-mentioned plasticizer which can be used in the present invention. Further, as the retardation film constituting the second phase difference field, a cyclic olefin polymer film is preferably used. The raw material of the cyclic olefin-based polymer film, the method for producing the same, and the method for producing the film using the raw material are described in detail in [0098] to [0193] of JP-A-2006-293342. The invention can be referred to. In the example of the cyclic olefin-based polymer film-59-201118476 which is a retardation film in the second phase difference field, a norbornene-based polymer film is used, and a commercially available polymer can be made of ARTON ( JSR system, ZERONOR (made in Japan). Various polymer films used as the retardation film constituting the second phase difference field can be produced by various methods. For example, a solution casting method (solution casting method), a melt extrusion method, a calendering method, a compression molding method, and the like can be given. Among these film forming methods, a solution casting method (solution casting method) or a melt extrusion method is particularly preferred. Further, various polymer films which are phase difference films constituting the second phase difference field can be formed by stretching treatment after molding. The extension of the film may be a 1-axis extension or a 2-axis extension. Preferably, the two-axis extension process is performed simultaneously or sequentially. In order to achieve large optical anisotropy, the film must be stretched with a high stretch ratio. For example, it is preferred to extend in the width direction of the film and in the longitudinal direction (flow direction) of the film. The stretching ratio is preferably about 3 to 100%. The extension process can be carried out using a tenter. Alternatively, longitudinal stretching can be carried out between the rolls. A lamination casting method such as a co-casting method, a sequential casting method, or a coating method may be used as the above-described solution casting method. In the case of production by the co-casting method and the sequential casting method, first, a deuterated cellulose solution (coating liquid) for each layer is prepared. The co-casting method (multi-layer simultaneous casting) is performed on a casting support (belt or drum), and each of the layers (which may be three or more) is simultaneously extruded from another slit or the like. The coating liquid is extruded by a nozzle for casting a coating liquid. The layers are simultaneously cast, peeled off from the support at an appropriate timing, and dried to form a film casting method. In the casting method, the casting solution for the first layer is extruded and cast from the nozzle of -60-201118476, and dried or not dried, on the casting support. The coating liquid for casting of the second layer is used as a point of casting, and if necessary, it can be successively cast. The layered coating liquid is discharged to the third layer or more, and is peeled off and dried from the support at an appropriate timing. Casting method of formed film. In general, in the coating method, a film of a core layer is formed into a film by a solution film forming method, and a coating liquid applied to a surface layer is prepared, and coated on each side or both surfaces by a suitable coater, and the coating liquid is dried to form a film. A method of forming a film of a laminated structure. Further, the retardation film constituting the second phase difference region may be a layer formed by fixing the alignment state after the liquid crystal composition is formed into a desired alignment state, or may have both the layer and the polymerization supporting the layer. a laminate of a film of matter. In the latter aspect, the polymer film can also be used as a protective film for polarizers. In the example of the liquid crystal which can be used for the production of the retardation film in the second phase difference region, various liquid crystals such as a rod-like liquid crystal, a discotic liquid crystal, and a cholesteric liquid crystal are included. In order to obtain a higher front surface CR, the retardation film constituting the second phase difference region disposed on the front side preferably has a haze of 0.5 or less, preferably 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less. In order to suppress corner unevenness, it is necessary to reduce the phase difference film deformation due to the stress falling on the retardation film. The film thickness of the retardation film constituting the second phase difference region disposed on the front side is preferably 20/zm or more and 200 or less, from the viewpoint of suppressing corner unevenness and manufacturing suitability. 3. Polarized photons [S] -61 - 201118476 The polarizing sub-systems disposed on the front side and the rear side are not particularly limited. A linear polarizing film which is generally used can be used. The linear polarizing film is preferably a coating type polarizing film typified by Op tivalnc. or a polarizing film composed of a binder and iodine or a dichroic dye. The iodine and the dichroic pigment in the linear polarizing film are aligned in the binder to find polarizing properties. The iodine and the dichroic dye are preferably aligned in a single direction by being aligned along the binder molecules or by self-organizing the dichroic dye such as a liquid crystal. Commercially available polarizers are generally prepared by immersing an extended polymer in a bath in a solution of iodine or a dichroic dye, and impregnating the binder with iodine or a dichroic dye in a binder. . 4. Protective film It is preferable to apply a protective film on both sides of the front side polarizer and the rear side polarizer. However, as shown in FIG. 1, the first and second phase difference fields are composed of one film, and in the case where the film also functions as a protective film, the surface of the liquid crystal cell can be polarized. The protective film is omitted. In a state in which a protective film and one or more retardation films are disposed between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, the protective film and one or more retardation films are provided as a laminate, and are satisfied with the first phase. The optical properties required in the field of difference. The preferred material of the protective film is the same as that of the preferred material constituting the retardation film in the first phase difference field. In the aspect in which a protective film and one or more retardation films are disposed between the front side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell, the protective film and one or more retardation films are preferably used as the laminate, and are satisfied with the second. Optical properties required in the field of phase difference. The protective film is combined with one or more retardation films-62-201118476 to improve the contrast in the oblique direction and to reduce the color shift during black display, that is, to display a certain degree of Re and Rth phase difference film. The protective film disposed on the outer side of the front side polarizer and the rear side polarizer is not particularly limited. A variety of polymer films can be used. It can be the same as the example of the retardation film constituting the first phase difference region described above. Examples thereof include deuterated cellulose (for example, a film of cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate, etc.), polyolefin (for example, norbornene-based polymer, polypropylene), poly(methyl). A acrylate (for example, polymethyl methacrylate), a polycarbonate, a polyester, or a film mainly composed of polyfluorene, but is not limited thereto. A commercially available polymer film (in bismuth fiber) may also be used. In the case of the TD80UL (manufactured by Fujifilm Co., Ltd.), it is ARTON (JSR), ZEONOR (manufactured by Nippon Seisakusho Co., Ltd.) in terms of the decene-based polymer. Examples Hereinafter, examples will be further described to explain the present specification. The materials, reagents, masses, ratios, operations, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the scope of the main contents of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to Specific examples of the production of the film 1 to 6 are described in the following table: The type of sulfhydryl group and the degree of substitution of different grades of cellulose. The addition of sulfuric acid (7.8 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of cellulose) Parts by mass) As a catalyst, a carboxylic acid which is a mercapto substituent raw material is added and a deuteration reaction is carried out at 40 ° C. At this time, the type and amount of the carboxylic acid are adjusted, and the type and degree of substitution of the mercapto group are adjusted. After aging, it is aged at 40 ° C. -63- 201118476 Further, the low molecular weight component of the deuterated cellulose is removed by washing with acetone. In addition, the so-called Ac system in the table means an ethyl group, and the so-called CTA system means A cellulose triacetate (a cellulose ester derivative composed of an acetate group only). (Deuterated cellulose solution) The following composition is put into a mixing tank, and the ingredients are stirred and dissolved, and then 9 After heating at 0 ° C for about 10 minutes, it was filtered with a filter paper having an average pore diameter of 34 μm and a calcined metal filter having an average pore diameter of 10 # m. Deuterated cellulose solution deuterated cellulose 1 0 0 · 0 parts by mass of triphenyl phosphate Ester (TPP) 7.8 parts by mass of biphenyldiphenyl phosphate (BDP) 3.9 parts by mass of dichloromethane 40 3.0 parts by mass of methanol 60.2 parts by mass (mater dispersion) Next, the oxime prepared in the above method is contained The following composition of the cellulose solution Into the disperser, the matting agent dispersion is prepared. -64- 201118476 Meteorite particles with an average particle diameter of 16 nm of matting agent dispersion (Aerosol R972 Japan AER Ο SIL (manufactured by A)) 2.0 parts by mass of dichloromethane 7 2.4 parts by mass Methanol 1 0.8 parts by mass of a deuterated cellulose solution 1 〇. 3 parts by mass of {additive solution) Next, the following composition containing the deuterated cellulose solution prepared in the above method is placed in a mixing tank and heated while being heated. Stirring and dissolving to prepare the additive solution. Additive solution retardation 値 performance agent (1) 2 〇. 〇 mass part of dichlorocarbyl group 58.3 parts by mass of methanol 8.7 parts by mass of bismuth cellulose solution 1 2.8 parts by mass of the above-mentioned bismuth cellulose The amount of the solution is 1 part by mass, the amount of the matting agent dispersion is 1.35 parts by mass, and the additive solution of the hysteresis 値 expression agent (1) in the deuterated cellulose-based film is 10 parts by mass. -65- 201118476 Coating solution for film. The addition ratio of the additive is the mass part when the amount of the cellulose is 100 parts by mass of the sulphated cellulose. The cotton and the additives described in the following table are changed to prepare the above-mentioned solution and dispersion. Here, the abbreviations of the additives and plasticizers described in the following tables are as follows. CTA : Triethylene fluorene cellulose TPP : Triphenyl phosphate BDP: Biphenyl diphenyl phosphate Hysteresis bismuth (1)

使用皮帶流延機流延上述的塗布液。使用在下述表中 記載的殘留溶劑量而從皮帶剝下的薄膜,在剝下至拉幅機 的區間,以下述表中記載之延伸倍率朝縱向方向進行延 伸,接著使用拉幅機,在以下述表中記載之延伸倍率朝寬 度方向延伸,且進行橫向延伸後,以在下述表中記載之倍 率使其朝寬度方向收縮(緩和)之後,將薄膜從拉幅機脫離 下來,以製膜成醯化纖維素系薄膜。拉幅機離脫時薄膜的 殘留溶劑量係如下述表中所記載。在卷取部前切斷兩端 部,以卷取成寬爲2000mm,長度爲4000m的軋輥薄膜。 -66- 201118476 延伸倍率係表示於下述表中。針對所製作的醯化纖維素系 薄膜,測定在25°C 60%RH且在波長590nm的Re遲滯値、 及Rth遲滯値。將這裡的結果記載於下述表中。另外,平 均折射率當作1.48以算出Rth( λ )。 [表31 醯化纖維素薄膜 薄膜1 薄膜2 薄膜3 薄膜4 薄膜5 薄膜6 綿種 CTA CTA CTA CTA CTA CTA 總取代度 2.81 2.81 2.81 2.81 2.81 2.81 6位取代度 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320 5位取代度 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 取代度 Ac Ac Ac Ac Ac Ac 添加 劑 添加劑種類 遲滯値 表現劑 (1) 遲滯値 表現劑 (1) 遲滞値 表現劑 (1) 遲滯値 表現劑 (1) 遲滞値 表現劑 (1) 遲滯値 表現劑 ⑴ 添加量 [質量份對總 100質量份] 10 10 12 6.4 9 2.2 可塑 劑 可塑劑麵 TPP/ BDP TPP/ BDP TPP/ BDP TPP/ BDP TPP/ BDP TPP/ BDP 可塑劑量 [質量份對總 100質量份】 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 延伸 條件 縱向延伸倍 率[%] 20 20 20 3 30 5 橫向延伸倍 率[%1 32 40 35 32 60 40 緩和率[%】 7 7 7 7 7 7 延伸速度 [%/min】 35 35 35 35 100 35 膜面溫度[〇c] 120 120 120 120 160 120 剝下時殘留 溶劑量[%】 50 50 50 50 46 55 延伸結束時 殘留溶劑量 1%) 10 10 10 10 10 12The above coating liquid was cast using a belt casting machine. The film peeled off from the belt using the amount of residual solvent described in the following table is stretched in the longitudinal direction by the stretching ratio described in the following table in the section which is peeled off to the tenter, and then the tenter is used, and the following The stretching ratio described in the above table extends in the width direction, and after stretching in the transverse direction, the film is shrunk (relaxed) in the width direction at a magnification described in the following table, and then the film is detached from the tenter to form a film. Deuterated cellulose film. The amount of residual solvent of the film when the tenter is off is as described in the following table. The both ends were cut before the take-up portion to take up a roll film having a width of 2000 mm and a length of 4000 m. -66- 201118476 The extension ratio is shown in the table below. With respect to the produced deuterated cellulose-based film, Re hysteresis 及 at a wavelength of 590 nm at 25 ° C and Rh hysteresis 测定 were measured. The results herein are shown in the following table. Further, the average refractive index was taken as 1.48 to calculate Rth(λ). [Table 31 Deuterated cellulose film film 1 Film 2 Film 3 Film 4 Film 5 Film 6 Cotton CTA CTA CTA CTA CTA CTA Total substitution degree 2.81 2.81 2.81 2.81 2.81 2.81 6-position substitution degree 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320 5-position substitution Degree 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 Degree of substitution Ac Ac Ac Ac Ac Ac Additive additive type hysteresis 値 performance agent (1) Hysteresis 値 performance agent (1) Hysteresis 値 performance agent (1) Hysteresis 値 performance agent (1) Hysteresis 値Performance agent (1) Hysteresis 値 値 ( ( ( Plastic dosage [mass part to total 100 parts by mass] 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 7.8/3.9 Extension condition Longitudinal stretching ratio [%] 20 20 20 3 30 5 Lateral stretching ratio [%1 32 40 35 32 60 40 Relaxation rate [%] 7 7 7 7 7 7 Extension speed [%/min] 35 35 35 35 100 35 Film surface temperature [〇c] 120 120 120 120 160 120 Residual solvent amount when peeled off [% 】 50 50 50 50 46 55 1% residual solvent at the end of the extension) 10 10 10 10 10 12

-67- 201118476 2 .薄膜7的製作 用與在特開2003-315556號公報的實施例2中記載 之光學補償 A層同樣的方法,得到 Re (59 0) 77nm、及 Rth(590)47nm的相位差薄膜7。 3 .薄膜8的製作 準備Z-TAC薄膜(富士軟片公司製、Re(590) = lnm、 Rth(590) = -lnm)。另外,用與特開2003-3 1 5556號公報 的實施例2中記載之光學補償B層同樣的方法,得到-67-201118476 2 . The film 7 was produced in the same manner as the optical compensation layer A described in Example 2 of JP-A-2003-315556, and Re (59 0) 77 nm and Rth (590) 47 nm were obtained. Phase difference film 7. 3. Production of Film 8 A Z-TAC film (manufactured by Fujifilm Co., Ltd., Re(590) = 1 nm, Rth (590) = -lnm) was prepared. Further, the same method as that of the optical compensation layer B described in Example 2 of JP-A-2003-3 1 5556 was obtained.

Re(590}1.5nm、Rth(590}207nm 的相位差薄膜 8a。將該 相位差薄膜8a貼合於Z-TAC的表面, 且作爲薄膜8使用。 4 .薄膜9的製作 以製作積層薄膜, 將下述的組成物投入混合槽中,一邊加熱、一邊攪持, 溶解各成分,以調製醯化纖維素溶液C。 <醯化纖維素溶液C組成> 取代度2.86的乙酸纖維素 1〇〇質量份 二氯甲烷(第1溶媒) 300質量份 甲醇(第2溶媒) 54質量份 1-丁醇 11質量份 在另一混合槽中投入下述的組成物,一邊加熱、—邊 攪拌,溶解各成分,以調製添加劑溶液D。 <添加劑溶液D組成> 二氯甲烷 8〇質量份 甲醇 2 0質量份 -68 201118476 下述的光學異方向性降低劑A-7 40質量份 光學異方向性降低劑A-7 在465質量份的醯化纖維素溶液C中添加40質量份 的添加劑溶液D,以調製塗布液。該塗布溶液的透明度爲 85%以上爲良好。 將該塗布液流延於支持體上,以製作厚度80/zm的醯 化纖維素系薄膜。將其作爲薄膜9使用。 5 .薄膜1 0的製作 按照特開2007-127893號公報的[0223卜[0226】的記 載,製作延伸薄膜(保護薄膜A)。在該保護薄膜A的表面 上,按照同公報的[02 32]的記載,調製易黏著層塗布組成 物 P-2,該該組成物係按照同公報的[0246]中記載的方 法,塗布至前述延伸薄膜的表面而形成易黏著層。將該薄 膜作爲薄膜10使用。 6. 薄膜1 1的準備 準備市售的三乙醯纖維素薄膜「TF80UL」(富士軟片 製)作爲薄膜1 1。 7. 薄膜12~16的準備 (聚合物溶液的調製) 1)醯化纖維素 從下述的醯化纖維素A及B之中,選擇如下述表4中 所記載者而使用。各醯化纖維素係在1 2 0 °C進行加熱乾 -69- 201118476 燥,且含水率爲0.5質量%以下之後,使用20質量份。 •醯化纖維素A : 使用取代度爲2.93的乙酸纖維素的粉體。醯化纖維素 A的黏度平均聚合度爲300、6位的乙醯基取代度爲0.94。 •醯化纖維素B : 使用取代度爲2.86的乙酸纖維素的粉體。醯化纖維素 B的黏度平均聚合度爲300, 6位的乙醯基取代度爲0.89, 丙酮抽出分爲7質量%,質量平均分子量/數量平均分子量 比爲2.3,含水率爲0.2質量%,在6質量%二氯甲烷溶液 中的黏度爲305mPa· s,殘存乙酸量爲〇. 1質量。/。以下, Ca含量爲65ppm,Mg含量爲26ppm、鐵含量爲0.8ppm、 硫酸離子含量爲18ppm、黃色指數爲1.9,遊離乙酸量爲 47ppm。粉體的平均粒子尺寸爲 1.5mm,標準偏差爲 0.5mm » 2}溶媒 使用下述的溶媒A。各溶媒的含水率係均爲0.2質量% 以下。Re (590} 1.5 nm, Rth (590} 207 nm retardation film 8a. The retardation film 8a is bonded to the surface of Z-TAC and used as the film 8. 4. The film 9 is produced to form a laminated film. The following composition was placed in a mixing tank, and while stirring, the components were dissolved to dissolve the deuterated cellulose solution C. <Deuterated cellulose solution C composition> Cellulose acetate 1 having a degree of substitution of 2.86 〇〇 mass part of dichloromethane (first solvent) 300 parts by mass of methanol (second solvent) 54 parts by mass of 1-butanol 11 parts by mass. The following composition was placed in another mixing tank, and while stirring, stirring The components are dissolved to prepare an additive solution D. <Additive Solution D Composition> Dichloromethane 8 parts by mass methanol 20 parts by mass -68 201118476 The following optical anisotropy reducing agent A-7 40 parts by mass optical The isotropic agent A-7 was added to 40 parts by mass of the additive solution D in 465 parts by mass of the deuterated cellulose solution C to prepare a coating liquid. The transparency of the coating solution was preferably 85% or more. Cast on the support to make thick 80/zm deuterated cellulose-based film, which is used as film 9. 5. Preparation of film 10 A stretch film (protective film A) was produced in accordance with [0223 [0226] of JP-A-2007-127893. On the surface of the protective film A, the easy-adhesion layer coating composition P-2 is prepared according to the method described in [0232] of the same publication, and the composition is in accordance with the method described in [0246] of the same publication. The film is applied to the surface of the stretched film to form an easy-adhesion layer. The film is used as the film 10. 6. Preparation of the film 1 1 A commercially available triacetone cellulose film "TF80UL" (manufactured by Fujifilm) is used as the film 1 1 7. Preparation of Films 12 to 16 (Preparation of Polymer Solution) 1) Deuterated cellulose is selected from the following deuterated celluloses A and B as described in Table 4 below. The cellulose is dried at -120 ° C and dried at -69 to 201118476, and after the water content is 0.5% by mass or less, 20 parts by mass is used. • Deuterated cellulose A: Cellulose acetate having a degree of substitution of 2.93 is used. Powder. The average degree of viscosity of deuterated cellulose A is 300, 6 The degree of substitution of acetyl group is 0.94. • Deuterated cellulose B: A powder of cellulose acetate with a degree of substitution of 2.86 is used. The average degree of viscosity of deuterated cellulose B is 300, and the degree of substitution of acetyl group at position 6 is 0.89, acetone extraction was divided into 7 mass%, mass average molecular weight / number average molecular weight ratio was 2.3, water content was 0.2 mass%, viscosity in 6% mass% dichloromethane solution was 305 mPa·s, and residual acetic acid amount was 〇. 1 quality. /. Hereinafter, the Ca content was 65 ppm, the Mg content was 26 ppm, the iron content was 0.8 ppm, the sulfate ion content was 18 ppm, the yellow index was 1.9, and the free acetic acid amount was 47 ppm. The powder had an average particle size of 1.5 mm and a standard deviation of 0.5 mm. 2} Solvent The following solvent A was used. The water content of each solvent is 0.2% by mass or less.

.溶媒A 二氯甲烷/甲醇= 90/10質量份 3)添加劑 從下述的添加劑A及B之中,選擇下述表4中記載者 而使用。Solvent A Methylene chloride/methanol = 90/10 parts by mass 3) Additives Among the following additives A and B, those described in the following Table 4 were used and used.

•添加劑A 一氧化砂微粒子(粒子尺寸20nm'莫氏硬度約7)(0.08 -70- 201118476 質量份)• Additive A. Monoxide sand particles (particle size 20nm 'Mohs hardness about 7) (0.08 -70- 201118476 parts by mass)

•添加劑B 磷酸三苯酯(1.6質量份) 磷酸聯苯基二苯酯(〇·8質量份) 二氧化矽微粒子(粒子尺寸20nm、莫氏硬度約7)(0.08 質量份} 4)溶解 使用下述的溶解步驟A進行膨潤、溶解》• Additive B Triphenyl phosphate (1.6 parts by mass) Biphenyl diphenyl phosphate (〇·8 parts by mass) Antimony dioxide fine particles (particle size 20 nm, Mohs hardness: about 7) (0.08 parts by mass) 4) Dissolved and used The swelling step A described below is carried out by swelling and dissolving"

•溶解步驟A 在具有攪拌葉片且外周有冷却水循環之400公升的不 鏽鋼製溶解槽中,投入前述溶媒及添加劑,一邊攪拌、分 散、一邊緩緩地添加前述醯化纖維素。投入結束後,在室 溫攪拌2小時,使其膨潤3小時後再次實施攪拌,以得到 醯化纖維素膨潤溶液。 另外,攪拌方面係使用以 15m/Sec(剪切應力 5 X 1 0 4 kgf / m / se c 2 ( 4.9 x 1 0 5 N / m / s e c 2 ])的周速進行攪 拌之溶解器類型的偏芯攪拌軸,及在中心軸具有錨翼且以 周 速 lm/sec(剪 切應力 1 x 1 〇4kgf / m/sec2 〔9.8><104N/m/sec2〕)進行攪拌之攪拌軸。膨潤係停止高 速攪拌軸,且具有錨翼之攪拌軸的周速爲〇.5m/SeC而實 施。 從儲槽將經膨潤之溶液以附有套管之配管加熱至 50°C,進而在2MPa的加壓化下加熱至90°C,而完全溶解。 加熱時間爲15分鐘。此時,曝露於高溫之過濾器、罩殼、 -71- 201118476 及配管係利用赫史特(Hastelloy)合金製且耐腐蝕性優異 者,且具有使保溫加熱用的熱媒流通之套管者。 接著,降低溫度至361以得到醯化纖維素溶液。 5)過濾 用絶對過濾精度l〇#m的濾紙(#63、東洋濾紙(股)製) 過濾所得之醯化纖維素溶液,進而在絶對過濾精度2.5// m 的金屬熘燒過濾器(FH025、波爾公司製)中過濾以得到聚 .合物溶液。 (薄膜的製作> 利用下述的製膜步驟A而製膜。- Dissolution step A In the 400 liter stainless steel dissolution tank which has a stirring blade and has a cooling water circulation on the outer circumference, the above-mentioned solvent and additives are charged, and the above-mentioned deuterated cellulose is gradually added while stirring and dispersing. After the completion of the injection, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, allowed to swell for 3 hours, and then stirred again to obtain a deuterated cellulose swelling solution. In addition, the stirring type is a type of dissolver which is stirred at a peripheral speed of 15 m/Sec (shear stress 5 X 1 0 4 kgf / m / se c 2 (4.9 x 1 0 5 N / m / sec 2 )) The eccentric agitating shaft and the agitating shaft having an anchor blade at the center axis and stirring at a peripheral speed of lm/sec (shear stress 1 x 1 〇 4 kgf / m/sec 2 [9.8 >< 104 N/m/sec 2 )) The swelling system stops the high-speed stirring shaft, and the peripheral speed of the stirring shaft with the anchor wing is 〇.5m/SeC. The swelled solution is heated from the storage tank to the pipe with the casing to 50 ° C, and then 2MPa is heated to 90 ° C under pressure, and completely dissolved. Heating time is 15 minutes. At this time, the filter, cover, -71-201118476 and piping system exposed to high temperature use Hastelloy It is excellent in corrosion resistance and has a casing for circulating heat medium for heat preservation and heating. Next, the temperature is lowered to 361 to obtain a cellulose-deposited cellulose solution. 5) Filter paper with absolute filtration accuracy l〇#m for filtration (#63, manufactured by Toyo Filter Paper Co., Ltd.) The obtained deuterated cellulose solution was filtered to obtain an absolute filtration accuracy of 2.5//m gold. It was filtered in a simmering filter (FH025, manufactured by Boer Co., Ltd.) to obtain a polymer solution. (Production of Film) The film was formed by the film forming step A described below.

•製膜步驟A 使前述醯化纖維素溶液加溫至30°C,通過流延噴嘴(記 載於特開平11-314233號公報),流延至設定成15 °C之皮 帶長60m的鏡面不鏽鋼支持體上。流延速度爲50m/分、 塗布寬爲200cm。流延部全體的空間溫度係設定在15°C。 然後,將在從流延部的終點部至50 cm之前進行流延、回 轉之醯化纖維素系薄膜從皮帶剝下,且送風4 5°C的乾燥 風。接著,在1 l〇°C乾燥5分鐘、進而在140°C乾燥10 分鐘,以得到醯化纖維素的透明薄膜》 (延伸) 如下述表4所示,利用下述的延伸步驟A或B中任一 者來實施延伸步驟。• Film-forming step A The pulverized stainless steel solution is heated to 30° C., and is cast by a casting nozzle (described in JP-A-11-314233) and cast to a mirror stainless steel of a belt length of 60 m set at 15 °C. Physically. The casting speed was 50 m/min and the coating width was 200 cm. The space temperature of the entire casting portion was set at 15 °C. Then, the cellulose-cellulose-based film which was cast and rotated from the end portion of the casting portion to 50 cm before the peeling was peeled off from the belt, and a dry air of 45 ° C was blown. Subsequently, it was dried at 1 l ° C for 5 minutes and further dried at 140 ° C for 10 minutes to obtain a transparent film of deuterated cellulose. (Extension) As shown in Table 4 below, the following elongation step A or B was used. Either to implement the extension step.

•延伸步驟A 使用在2個壓送軋輥間具有加熱區之裝置延伸所得之 -72- 201118476 薄膜。調整壓送軋輥間的距離以使得縱橫比(壓送軋輥間的 距離/基底進口寬度)爲0.1,在進入加熱區之前的基底溫 度爲25 °C,加熱區係爲下述表4中記載的溫度。另外’藉 由維持輸送的壓送軋輥的速度、與卷取的壓送軋輥的速度 之速度比,以便調整成下述表4中記載的延伸倍率。• Extension Step A The resulting -72-201118476 film was extended using a device having a heated zone between the two press rolls. The distance between the press rolls was adjusted so that the aspect ratio (the distance between the press rolls / the substrate inlet width) was 0.1, the substrate temperature before entering the heating zone was 25 ° C, and the heating zone was as described in Table 4 below. temperature. Further, the ratio of the speed of the conveyed feed rolls to the speed of the wound feed rolls was adjusted so as to be adjusted to the stretch ratio described in Table 4 below.

•延伸步驟B 利用拉幅機夾鉗把持所得之薄膜的兩端後’在加熱區 内朝與搬送方向成正交之方向延伸。加熱區係設定成下述 表4中記載的溫度,及從拉幅機的擴縮率所算出之延伸倍 率係作爲下述表4中記載的倍率。 如以上所述,製作薄膜1 2 ~ 1 6。彙整製作條件於下述 表4中。 [表4] 醯化纖維素 添加劑 步驟 溫度[°c] 倍率[%] 薄膜ί _2 A A A 185 15 薄膜13 A A A 185 10 薄膜14 B B B 170 30 薄膜1·5 B A A 200 35 薄膜1_6 B B B 180 40 8. 薄膜17的準備 在薄膜4的製作中,除了變更遲滯値表現劑(1)的添加 量爲12質量份、變更縱向延伸倍率爲20%、及變更橫向 延伸倍率爲35%以外,進行同樣地製作。 9. 薄膜18的準備 在薄膜5的製作中,除了變更遲滯値表現劑(1)的添加 -73- 201118476 量爲7·2質量份、變更縱向延伸倍率爲35。/。、及變更橫向 延伸倍率爲75%以外,進行同樣地製作。 1 0 .薄膜1 9的製作 利用固態電暈處理機6KVA(PILAR(股}製),對市售的 降萡烯系聚合物薄膜「ZEONORZF14-060」(OPTES(股) 製)的表面’進行電暈放電處理。使用該薄膜作爲薄膜19。 該薄膜的厚度爲60 Am。 1 1 .薄膜2 0的製作 用與薄膜18同樣的方法,對市售的環烯烴系聚合物薄 膜「ARTONFLZR50」(JSR(股)製)的表面,進行電暈放電 處理。使用該薄膜作爲薄膜20。該薄膜的厚度爲50/zm。 1 2 ·薄膜2 1的製作 使市售的降萡烯系聚合物薄膜「ZEONORZF14-100j (OPTES(股)製)在溫度142°C於MD方向以1.55倍、於TD 方向以1.8倍,進行固定端二軸延伸之後,利用固態電暈 處理機6KVA(PILAR(股)製)對其表面進行電暈放電處理。 使用該薄膜作爲薄膜21。該薄膜的厚度爲38/zm。 13.薄膜22的製作 準備醯化丙酸纖維素(「CAP482-20」(Eastman Chemical公司製);乙醯基取代度0.2、丙醯基取代度 2.4)。於其中加入8質量%的I、4-伸苯基-四苯基磷酸酯 作爲可塑劑、0.5 質量%的 IRGANOX-101〇(Ciba Specialty Chemicals公司製)作爲劣化防止劑(抗氧化 劑),在轉鼓型混合機混合3 0分鐘。利用除濕熱風式乾燥 -74- 201118476 機((股)松井製作所DMZ2),使所得之混合物在熱風溫度 150 °C、露點-36 °C下予以乾燥。接著,該混合物供給至 TECHNOVEL(股)製二軸擠壓機內,從在擠壓機中間部設置 有添加劑料斗之開口部,利用連續式供料機添加作爲消光 劑之 AER〇SIL(AEROSIL)200V(0.016y m 的矽石微粒 子、日本AEROSIL公司製)以使得壓出量爲〇.〇5%,且添 加作爲紫外線吸收劑之契姆必(TINUVIN)360(Ciba Specialty Chemicals公司製)以使得從相同開口部所壓出 的量爲0.5%,而使其熔融擠壓。經熔融擠壓之薄膜的膜厚 爲 2 2 0 // m。 再者’使該薄膜在溫度142 °C下,朝MD方向以1.3 倍、朝TD方向以2.4倍進行固定端二軸延伸,以製作薄 膜。使用該薄膜作爲薄膜22。另外,該薄膜的膜厚爲 7 0 从 m。 14·薄膜23的製作 在薄膜1的製作中,除了使用下述表所示之醯化纖維 素作爲原料 '及將製造條件取代成下述表所表示的以外, 與薄膜1的製作同樣地製作薄膜,且將其使用作爲薄膜 23。另外’下述的添加劑及可塑劑的略稱係與上述同義。 -75- 201118476 [表5] 醯讎維素薄膜 薄膜23 綿 綿種 CTA 總取代度 2.81 6位取代度 0.320 5位取代度 0.9 取代度 Ac 添加劑 添加劑種類 遲滯値表現劑(1)/ 遲滯値表現劑(2) 添加量 [質量份對總100質量份】 3.2/7.7 可塑劑 可塑劑觀 TPP/BDP 可塑劑量 [質量份對總100質量份] 7.8/3.9 延伸條件 縱向延伸倍率[%】 3 橫向延伸倍率[%] 47 緩和率[%] 7 延伸速度[o/o/min】 35 膜面溫度[〇C] 120 剝下時殘留溶劑量[%1 55 延伸結束時殘留溶劑量[%] 13 遲滞値表現劑(2)• The extending step B is carried out by holding the both ends of the obtained film by a tenter clamp, and extending in a direction orthogonal to the conveying direction in the heating zone. The heating zone was set to the temperature described in Table 4 below, and the stretching ratio calculated from the expansion ratio of the tenter was used as the magnification described in Table 4 below. Films 1 2 to 16 were produced as described above. The production conditions are summarized in Table 4 below. [Table 4] Deuterated cellulose additive Step temperature [°c] Magnification [%] Film ί _2 AAA 185 15 Film 13 AAA 185 10 Film 14 BBB 170 30 Film 1·5 BAA 200 35 Film 1_6 BBB 180 40 8. Film Preparation of 17 In the production of the film 4, the same amount was produced except that the amount of addition of the retardation agent (1) was changed to 12 parts by mass, the longitudinal stretching ratio was changed to 20%, and the lateral stretching ratio was changed to 35%. 9. Preparation of the film 18 In the production of the film 5, the amount of addition of the expression agent (1) was changed to 7.2 mass parts, and the longitudinal stretch ratio was changed to 35. /. The same production was carried out except that the lateral stretch ratio was changed to 75%. 1 0. Production of a film 19 using a solid corona treatment machine 6KVA (manufactured by PILAR) to carry out the surface of a commercially available norbornene-based polymer film "ZEONORZF14-060" (manufactured by OPTES Co., Ltd.) Corona discharge treatment. The film was used as the film 19. The thickness of the film was 60 Am. 1 1 . The film 20 was produced in the same manner as the film 18, and the commercially available cycloolefin polymer film "ARTONFLZR50" ( The surface of the JSR (manufactured by JSR) was subjected to corona discharge treatment. The film was used as the film 20. The thickness of the film was 50/zm. 1 2 · The film 2 1 was produced by using a commercially available norbornene-based polymer film. "ZEONORZF14-100j (made by OPTES) is 1.55 times in the MD direction and 1.8 times in the TD direction at a temperature of 142 °C. After the fixed end biaxial stretching, the solid corona treatment machine 6KVA (PILAR) is used. The surface was subjected to a corona discharge treatment. The film was used as the film 21. The thickness of the film was 38/zm. 13. Preparation of the film 22 was prepared to deuterate cellulose propionate ("CAP482-20" (Eastman Chemical Co., Ltd.) System); the substitution degree of acetonitrile is 0.2, the degree of substitution of propyl thiol is 2.4). 8 mass% of I, 4-phenylene-tetraphenyl phosphate was added as a plasticizer, and 0.5 mass% of IRGANOX-101(R) (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd.) was used as a deterioration preventing agent (antioxidant) in the drum. The mixer was mixed for 30 minutes, and the obtained mixture was dried at a hot air temperature of 150 ° C and a dew point of -36 ° C by means of a dehumidifying hot air drying-74-201118476 machine (DMZ2). The mixture was supplied to a TECHNOVEL (manufacturing) two-axis extruder, and an AER〇SIL (AEROSIL) 200V (0.016) was added as a matting agent by a continuous feeder from an opening portion of an additive hopper provided in the middle of the extruder.矽 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 微粒 TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN The amount of extrusion was 0.5%, and it was melt-extruded. The film thickness of the melt-extruded film was 2 2 0 // m. Further, 'the film was made at a temperature of 142 ° C toward the MD direction. 1.3 times, 2.4 times in the TD direction The film is fixed at the fixed end to form a film. The film is used as the film 22. The thickness of the film is 70 from m. 14·Production of film 23 In the production of film 1, except the following table is used. A film was produced in the same manner as in the production of the film 1 except that the cellulose hydride was used as the raw material, and the production conditions were replaced by the following table, and the film 23 was used as the film 23. Further, the abbreviations of the following additives and plasticizers are synonymous with the above. -75- 201118476 [Table 5] 醯雠维素膜膜23 Cotton CTA Total Substitution Degree 2.81 6 Degree of Substitution Degree 0.320 5 Degree of Substitution Degree 0.9 Substitution Degree Ac Additive Additive Type Hysteresis 値 Demonstrating Agent (1) / Hysteresis 値 剂(2) Addition amount [parts by mass to total 100 parts by mass] 3.2/7.7 Plasticizer plasticizer TPP/BDP Plastic dose [parts by mass to total 100 parts by mass] 7.8/3.9 Extended condition longitudinal extension ratio [%] 3 Lateral extension Magnification [%] 47 Relaxation rate [%] 7 Extension speed [o/o/min] 35 Film surface temperature [〇C] 120 Residual solvent amount when peeled off [%1 55 Residual solvent amount at the end of extension [%] 13 Late Hysteresis performance agent (2)

co2ch3 15.薄膜24的製作 (聚合物溶液的調製) 1) 聚合物 使用雙酚A與9,9-雙(4-羥基-3-甲基苯基)菲爲雙酚成 分之聚碳酸酯共聚物。將聚合物加熱至12 0°C進行乾燥, 且含水率成爲0.5質量%以下之後,使用20質量份。 2) 溶媒 -76- 201118476 使用下述的溶媒A。各溶媒的含水率係均爲0.2質量% 以下。Co2ch3 15. Preparation of film 24 (modulation of polymer solution) 1) Polymer copolymerization of bisphenol A and 9,9-bis(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)phenanthrene as a bisphenol component Things. The polymer was dried by heating to 120 ° C, and the water content was 0.5% by mass or less, and then 20 parts by mass was used. 2) Solvent -76- 201118476 The following solvent A was used. The water content of each solvent is 0.2% by mass or less.

•溶媒A 二氯甲烷=1〇〇質量份 3) 添加劑 使用下述的添加劑A。• Solvent A dichloromethane = 1 part by mass 3) Additive The following additive A was used.

•添加劑A 二氧化砂微粒子(粒子尺寸20nm、莫氏硬度約7)(0.08 質量份} 4) 溶解 利用下述的溶解步驟A進行膨潤、溶解。• Additive A Silica sand fine particles (particle size: 20 nm, Mohs hardness: about 7) (0.08 parts by mass) 4) Dissolution The swelling and the dissolution were carried out by the following dissolution step A.

•溶解步驟A 在具有攪拌葉片且外周有冷却水循環之400公升的不 鏽鋼製溶解槽中,投入前述溶媒及添加劑,一邊攪拌、分 散,一邊緩緩地添加前述聚合物。投入結束後,在室溫攪 拌2小時,以得到聚合物溶液。 5) 過濾 用絶對過濾精度l〇#m的濾紙(#63、東洋濾紙(股)製) 過濾所得之聚合物溶液,進而在絶對過濾精度2.5/zm的 金屬煅燒過濾器(FH02 5、波爾公司製)中過濾,以得到聚 合物溶液。 (薄膜的製作) 利用下述的製膜步驟A進行製膜。- Dissolution step A In the 400 liter stainless steel dissolution tank having a stirring blade and having a cooling water circulation on the outer periphery, the solvent and the additive are charged, and the polymer is gradually added while stirring and dispersing. After the end of the reaction, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours to obtain a polymer solution. 5) Filtration of the polymer solution by filtration with absolute filtration accuracy l〇#m (#63, manufactured by Toyo Filter Paper Co., Ltd.), and further metal calcination filter (FH02 5, Bohr) with absolute filtration accuracy of 2.5/zm Filtered in a company to obtain a polymer solution. (Production of Film) Film formation was carried out by the film forming step A described below.

•製膜步驟A -77- 201118476 加溫前述聚合物溶液至3 0°C,通過流延噴嘴(記載於 特開平11-314233號公報中),流延至設定成15 °C之皮帶 長60m的鏡面不鏽鋼支持體上。流延速度爲10m/分、塗 布寬爲150cm。流延部全體的空間溫度係設定爲15。〇。 然後’在從流延部的終點部至50 cm之前進行流延、回轉 之醯化纖維素系薄膜從皮帶剝下,且送風45 °C的乾燥風" 接著,在110X:乾燥5分鐘、進而在140 °C乾燥10分鐘, 以得到透明聚合物薄膜。 (延伸) 實施下述的延伸步驟A。- Film-forming step A-77-201118476 The temperature of the polymer solution was heated to 30 ° C, and it was cast through a casting nozzle (described in JP-A-11-314233) and cast to a belt length of 60 m set at 15 °C. Mirrored stainless steel support. The casting speed was 10 m/min and the coating width was 150 cm. The space temperature of the entire casting portion was set to 15. Hey. Then, 'the deuterated cellulose-based film which was cast and rotated from the end portion of the casting portion to 50 cm before being peeled off from the belt, and the air was blown at a temperature of 45 ° C. Then, at 110X: drying for 5 minutes, Further, it was dried at 140 ° C for 10 minutes to obtain a transparent polymer film. (Extension) The extension step A described below was carried out.

•延伸步驟A 使用在2個壓送軋輥間具有加熱區之裝置延伸所得之 薄膜。調整壓送軋輥間的距離以使得縱橫比(壓送軋輥間的 距離/基底進口寬度)爲8,在進入加熱區之前的基底溫度 爲25 °C,加熱區係爲210 °C。另外,藉由維持輸送的壓送 軋輥的速度、與卷取的壓送軋輥的速度之速度比,以得到 Re/Rth= 140/72nm的透明聚合物薄膜。 16.薄膜25的製作 使由2,2’-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)六氟丙烷、與2,2’·雙 (三氟甲基)-4,4二胺基聯苯所合成之聚醯亞胺溶解於環 己酮中,以調製15質量%的溶液。將該聚醯亞胺溶液塗布 於二軸延伸聚酯薄膜(基材)上,在12CTC中使其乾燥10分 鐘,形成厚度5 μ m的非液晶性聚合物層(光學補償B層) 以得到積層體。 -78- 201118476 使用黏著劑貼合該積層體與上述所製作之薄膜9。使 光學補償B層的表面與薄膜9的表面相接觸而貼合。然 後,去除基材以製作薄膜25。 17.薄膜26的製作 將下述的組成物投入混合槽中,一邊過熱、一邊攪拌 使得各成分溶解之後,用平均孔徑34 的濾紙及平均孔 徑10/im的煅燒金屬過濾器進行過濾,以調製醯化纖維素 溶液。 (醯化纖維素溶液) 取代度2.81的乙酸纖維素 1〇〇質量份 遲滯値表現劑(1) 遲滯値表現劑(3) 二氯甲烷 甲醇 前述遲滞値表現劑(3)的 外,下述表6中,EG表示 8.5質量份 7.0質量份 4 2 8.4質量份 6 4.0質量份 成係表示於下述表6中。另 乙二醇、TPA表示爲對苯二 甲酸、PA表示爲苯二甲酸、AA表示爲己二酸、SA表示爲 琥珀酸。另外’遲滯値表現.劑(3 )爲非磷酸系酯系化合物, 且爲具有作爲遲滯値表現劑功能之化合物。前述遲滯値表 現劑(3)的末端係用乙醯基被封止》 [表6] 遲滯値 表現劑 二醇單元 二羧酸單元 分子量 兩末端羥基封止率 (%) EG (%) 平均 碳數 TPA (莫耳%) PA (莫耳%) AA (莫耳%) SA (莫耳%) 平均 碳數 (3) 100 100 2 45 5 20 30 6 840 -79- 201118476 迅速地將上述所調製之醯化纖維素溶液流延至皮帶流 延機上。利用拉幅機在140T:下,將殘留溶劑量爲約30 質量%且自皮帶剝下的薄膜以16%的延伸倍率朝寬度方向 使其延伸。然後自拉幅機搬送移到軋輥搬送,進而在1 1 0°C 至150 °C下乾燥卷取,以製作薄膜26。另外,該薄膜的膜 厚爲8 5 μ m。 在薄膜26的製造,沒有發生於薄膜1的製造時所發 生的問題(在乾燥步驟等的高溫處理時的發煙、揮散之油分 等附著於製造機所引起的動作不宜、或附著於薄膜所引起 的面狀故障)。 由於其係在薄膜2 6的製作中,作爲遲滞値表現劑使用 之遲滯値表現劑(3)具有作爲可塑劑之功能,所以不使用在 薄膜1的製作中所使用之稱爲TPP及BDP之以往的低分 子可塑劑。 像這.樣使用如遲滞値表現劑(3)之前述正雙折射性化 合物,由於可解決前述的問題,所以前述正雙折射性化合 物從薄膜製造之觀點而言,可謂爲較佳的遲滯値表現劑。 18.薄膜27的製作 {低取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液) 將下述的組成物投入混合槽中,一邊過熱、一邊攪拌 且溶解各成分,以調製低取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液。 取代度2.43的乙酸纖維素 100質量份 遲滯値表現劑(1) 4 . 〇質量份 遲滯値表現劑(4) 10.0實量份 -80- 201118476 二氯甲烷 351.5質量份 甲醇 52.5質量份 表示前述遲滯値表現劑(4)的組成於下述表7中。另 外,下述表7中,EG表示爲乙二醇、PG表示爲丙二醇、 BG表示爲丁二醇、TPA表示爲對苯二甲酸、PA表示爲苯 二甲酸、AA表示爲己二酸、SA表示爲琥珀酸。另外,遲 滯値表現劑(4)係爲非磷酸系酯系化合物,且爲具有作爲遲 滯値表現劑功能之化合物。遲滞値表現劑(4)的末端係被乙 醯基所封止。 [表7] 遲滞値 表現劑 二醇1 降元 _ 二羧酸單元 分子量 兩末端羥 基封止率 (%) EG (%) PG (%) 平均 碳數 TPA (莫耳%} SA (莫耳%) 平均 碳數 (4) 100 50 50 2.5 55 45 6.2 730 (高取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液) 將下述的組成物投入混合槽中’攪拌且溶解各成分, 以調製高取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液。 取代度2.79的乙酸纖維素 100.0晳量份 遲滯値表現劑(4) 11.0質量份 平均粒徑16nm的砂石粒子 (Aerosol R972 日本 AER〇SIL(股)製)ο·” 質量份 二氯甲烷 395.0質量份 甲醇 59.0質量份 (醯化纖維素試料的製作) -81- 201118476 分別流延以便從前述低取代度層用ί 成膜厚82μιη的芯層、從前述高取代度, 液形成膜厚2^m的表皮Α層及表皮Β, 從皮帶上剝離下來,夾於夾鉗上,在對】 而言,殘留溶媒量爲2 0%的狀態時,在延 使用拉幅機朝寬度方向橫向延伸1 8%。: 下夾鉗,在130 °C下使其乾燥20分鐘, 19. 薄膜28的製作 在薄膜 27的製作中,除了將芯 75 // m、延伸倍率變更爲20%以外,進: 20. 薄膜29的製作 (低取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液) 將下述的組成物投入混合槽中,一: 且溶解各成分,以調製低取代度層用醯化 取代度2.43的乙酸纖維素 遲滯値表現劑(4) 二氯甲烷 甲醇 (高取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液) 將下述的組成物投入混合槽中,攪 以調製高取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液。 取代度2.79的乙酸纖維素 遲滯値表現劑(4) 平均粒徑16nm的矽石粒子 化纖維素溶液形 用醯化纖維素溶 。將所得之薄膜 薄膜全體的質量 ϊ溫度1 8 0 °C下, 後,從薄膜上卸 又製作薄膜2 7。 F的膜厚變更爲 同樣地製作。 過熱、一邊攪拌 纖維素溶液。 1 0 0質量份 1 8.5質量份 365.5質量份 54.6質量份 且溶解各成分, 1 0 0.0質量份 1 1.0質量份 -82- 201118476 (aerosilR972 日本 AEROSIL(股)製)0.15 質量份 二氯甲烷 395.0質量份 甲醇 59.0質量份 (醯化纖維素試料的製作) 分別流延以便從前述低取代度層用醯化纖維素溶液形 成膜厚37vm的芯層、從前述高取代度層用醯化纖維素溶 液形成膜厚2gm的表皮A層及表皮B層。將所得之薄膜 從皮帶上剝離下來,夾於夾鉗上,在對於薄膜全體的質量 而言,殘留溶媒量爲20 %的狀態時,在溫度200 °C下使其 乾燥30分鐘後,在130°C下使其乾燥20分鐘,以製作薄 膜29。 21.薄膜1~29的特性 彙整上述薄膜1~29的特性於以下表中。另外,各薄 膜的 Re(590)及 Rth(590)係將試料 30mmx40mm在 25°(3、60%RH下調濕2小時,且在KOBRA 21ADH(王子 計測機器(股)製)中於波長590nm下測定,關於薄膜1~6、 9、1卜18' 22、23、26~29係輸入平均折射率的假設値 1.48及膜厚而算出。另外,其以外之薄膜的情形係作爲平 均折射率的假設値,對於薄膜7及20使用1.52、對於薄 膜8使用1.60、對於薄膜1〇使用1.50、對於薄膜19、 對於薄膜21使用1.53、對於薄膜24使用1.59、對於薄 膜25使用1.58。 -83- 201118476 [表8】 膜厚(/z m) Re(590)(nm) Rth(590)(nm) 薄膜1 80 50 240 薄膜2 80 60 250 薄膜3 80 70 265 薄膜4 85 55 200 薄膜5 60 70 215 薄膜6 60 50 120 薄膜7 50 77 47 薄膜8 68 1.5 207 薄膜9 80 0.5 -2.1 薄膜10 30 0.8 1.5 薄膜11 80 3 45 薄膜12 57 15 10 薄膜13 59 10 10 薄膜14 62 10 30 薄膜15 51 10 25 薄膜16 57 15 25 薄膜17 70 62 238 薄膜18 58 67 223 薄膜19 60 1.9 3,1 薄膜20 50 1 1.8 3 薄膜21 38 1 60 250 薄膜22 70 60 250 薄膜23 45 75 160 薄膜24 80 140 72 薄膜25 85 4.5 178 薄膜26 85 60 250 薄膜27 86 60 250 薄膜28 79 61 230 薄膜29 41 0.5 45 22.偏光板的製作 將厚度80/zm的聚乙烯醇(PVA)薄膜,在30°C下浸漬 於碘濃度〇.〇5質量。/。的碘水溶液中60秒進行染色,接著 在硼酸濃度4質量%濃度的硼酸水溶液中浸漬60秒之間使 其縱向延伸成原來長度的5倍後,在50°C下使其乾燥4分 -84- 201118476 鐘,以得到厚度20μιη的偏光膜。 在上述表所示的薄膜1~29之中,如下述般,對於醯 化纖維素系薄膜進行皂化處理。將各薄膜浸漬於1.5莫耳/ 公升且55 °C的氫氧化鈉水溶液中之後,用水充分地沖洗氫 氧化鈉。然後,在0.005莫耳/公升且35 °C的稀硫酸水溶 液中浸漬1分鐘之後,浸漬於水中且充分地沖洗稀硫酸水 溶液。最後使試料在120 °C中充分地乾燥。 用薄膜1~29中的任2片夾持偏光膜,以製作貼合的 •偏光板。關於組合係表示於下述表中。 另外,關於醯化纖維素系薄膜之薄膜1〜9、11~18、 及22〜29,係使用聚乙烯醇系接着劑進行貼合;關於薄膜 10係將易黏著層貼合於偏光子的表面側;以及關於薄膜 1 9 ~ 2 1係利用丙烯酸系黏着劑來貼合。 另外,關於薄膜1~24、及26~28係使其面内遲相軸 與偏光子的透過軸成平行而貼合;及關於薄膜25、29係 使其面内遲相軸與偏光子的透過軸成正交而貼合。 23.VA型液晶顯示裝置的製作 (1) 液晶胞1的準備 準備LC-42RX1W(SHARP(股)公司製)作爲VA型液晶 顯示晶胞。使用其作爲液晶胞1。使用AXOMETRICS公司 製的AXOSCAN與附屬的軟體來測定液晶胞1的Δη£ι(59〇1 時,And(590)爲 300nm。 (2 )液晶胞2的準備 (2) -1紅色畫素部的形成• Extension step A uses a device having a heating zone between two press rolls to extend the resulting film. The distance between the press rolls was adjusted so that the aspect ratio (the distance between the press rolls / the substrate inlet width) was 8, the substrate temperature before entering the heating zone was 25 ° C, and the heating zone was 210 °C. Further, a transparent polymer film having a Re/Rth = 140/72 nm was obtained by maintaining a speed ratio of the speed of the conveyed pressure feed rolls to the speed of the wound feed rolls. 16. Film 25 is prepared from 2,2'-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane and 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4 diaminobiphenyl The synthesized polyimine was dissolved in cyclohexanone to prepare a 15% by mass solution. The polyimine solution was applied onto a biaxially stretched polyester film (substrate), and dried in 12 CTC for 10 minutes to form a non-liquid crystalline polymer layer (optical compensation layer B) having a thickness of 5 μm. Laminated body. -78- 201118476 The laminate and the film 9 produced above were bonded together using an adhesive. The surface of the optical compensation layer B is brought into contact with the surface of the film 9 to be bonded. Then, the substrate is removed to form a film 25. 17. Preparation of Film 26 The following composition was placed in a mixing tank, and after each component was dissolved by superheating, the mixture was filtered using a filter paper having an average pore diameter of 34 and a calcined metal filter having an average pore diameter of 10/im to prepare a film. Deuterated cellulose solution. (Deuterated cellulose solution) Cellulose acetate with a degree of substitution of 2.81 1 part by mass of hysteresis 値 expression agent (1) Hysteresis 値 expression agent (3) Methylene chloride methanol The above-mentioned retardation 値 expression agent (3) In Table 6, EG represents 8.5 parts by mass of 7.0 parts by mass of 4 2 8.4 parts by mass and 6 parts by mass of the system is shown in Table 6 below. Further, ethylene glycol, TPA is represented by terephthalic acid, PA is represented by phthalic acid, AA is represented by adipic acid, and SA is represented by succinic acid. Further, the retardation 値 shows that the agent (3) is a non-phosphoric acid ester-based compound and has a function as a hysteresis quinone agent. The end of the aforementioned retardation 値 expression agent (3) is blocked with an ethyl hydrazine group [Table 6] Hysteresis 値 Demonstrator diol unit Dicarboxylic acid unit molecular weight Both terminal hydroxyl group blocking ratio (%) EG (%) Average carbon Number of TPA (% by mole) PA (% by mole) AA (% by mole) SA (% by mole) Average carbon number (3) 100 100 2 45 5 20 30 6 840 -79- 201118476 Quickly modulate the above The deuterated cellulose solution is cast onto a belt casting machine. Using a tenter at 140 T:, the amount of residual solvent was about 30% by mass and the film peeled off from the belt was stretched in the width direction at a stretching ratio of 16%. Then, it is transferred from a tenter to a roll conveyance, and then dried and taken up at 110 ° C to 150 ° C to produce a film 26. Further, the film had a film thickness of 85 μm. In the production of the film 26, there is no problem that occurs in the production of the film 1 (the action caused by adhesion to the manufacturing machine during the high-temperature treatment such as the drying step or the like, or adhesion to the film is not preferable. The resulting planar failure). Since it is used in the production of the film 26, the hysteresis agent (3) used as a hysteresis agent has a function as a plasticizer, so that it is not used in the production of the film 1 and is called TPP and BDP. Previous low molecular plasticizers. As described above, the above-mentioned positive birefringent compound such as the retardation 値 expression agent (3) is used, and since the above problem can be solved, the above-mentioned positive birefringent compound is preferable as a hysteresis from the viewpoint of film production.値Performance agent. 18. Production of Film 27 {Deuterated Cellulose Solution for Low Substitution Layer) The following composition was placed in a mixing tank, and while stirring, the components were stirred and dissolved to prepare a low-substitution layer for deuterated cellulose. Solution. 100 parts by mass of cellulose acetate with a degree of substitution of 2.43, hysteresis 値 expression agent (1) 4 〇 mass parts of hysteresis 値 expression agent (4) 10.0 parts by weight -80- 201118476 dichloromethane 351.5 parts by mass of methanol 52.5 parts by mass means the aforementioned retardation The composition of the quinone agent (4) is shown in Table 7 below. Further, in the following Table 7, EG is represented by ethylene glycol, PG is represented by propylene glycol, BG is represented by butylene glycol, TPA is represented by terephthalic acid, PA is represented by phthalic acid, and AA is represented by adipic acid or SA. Expressed as succinic acid. Further, the delayed 値 expression agent (4) is a non-phosphoric acid ester-based compound and has a function as a late 値 値 expression agent. The end of the hysteresis agent (4) is blocked by an ethyl group. [Table 7] Hysteresis 値 Detergent diol 1 Lowering _ Dicarboxylic acid unit molecular weight Both terminal hydroxyl blocking ratio (%) EG (%) PG (%) Average carbon number TPA (mole%} SA (Mohr %) Average carbon number (4) 100 50 50 2.5 55 45 6.2 730 (Deuterated cellulose solution for high substitution layer) The following composition is put into a mixing tank to 'stir and dissolve the ingredients to prepare a high degree of substitution. The layer is made of a deuterated cellulose solution. The cellulose acetate having a degree of substitution of 2.79 is 100.0 parts by weight. The retardation agent (4) 11.0 parts by mass of sandstone particles having an average particle diameter of 16 nm (Aerosol R972, manufactured by AER〇SIL Co., Ltd., Japan) "Mass portion of methylene chloride 395.0 parts by mass of methanol 59.0 parts by mass (production of bismuth cellulose sample) -81 - 201118476 were respectively cast to form a core layer having a film thickness of 82 μm from the low-substitution layer, from the aforementioned high The degree of substitution, the liquid forms a skin layer of 2 μm and the epidermis, which is peeled off from the belt and clamped on the clamp. In the case where the amount of residual solvent is 20%, the use is extended. The tenter extends 180% laterally in the width direction.: Lower jaw, dry at 130 °C for 20 minutes 9. The production of the film 28 In the production of the film 27, except that the core 75 // m and the stretching ratio were changed to 20%, the film was produced: 20. The film 29 was produced (the low-substituted layer was made of a cellulose-deposited solution). The following composition is put into a mixing tank, one: and the components are dissolved to prepare a low-substitution layer with a cellulose acetate retardation 値 expression agent having a degree of substitution of 2.43 (4) dichloromethane methanol (high degree of substitution) The layer is made of a deuterated cellulose solution. The following composition is put into a mixing tank and stirred to prepare a high-substitution layer for the deuterated cellulose solution. The cellulose acetate hysteresis of the 2.79 degree substitution agent (4) The 16 nm vermiculite particleized cellulose solution was dissolved in deuterated cellulose. The mass of the obtained film film was 11 80 ° C, and then the film was unloaded from the film to form a film 27. The film thickness of F The mixture was prepared in the same manner. The cellulose solution was stirred while being overheated. 100 parts by mass 1 8.5 parts by mass 365.5 parts by mass 54.6 parts by mass and dissolved in each component, 1 0 0.0 parts by mass 1 1.0 part by mass - 82 - 201118476 (aerosilR972 Japan AEROSIL (share) system) 0 .15 parts by mass of methylene chloride, 395.0 parts by mass of methanol, 59.0 parts by mass (manufacture of a bismuth cellulose sample), respectively, were cast to form a core layer having a film thickness of 37 vm from the low-degree-substituted layer with a deuterated cellulose solution, from the aforementioned high The substitution layer was formed into a skin A layer and a skin B layer having a film thickness of 2 gm using a deuterated cellulose solution. The obtained film was peeled off from the belt and clamped on the clamp, and when the amount of the residual solvent was 20% in terms of the mass of the entire film, it was dried at a temperature of 200 ° C for 30 minutes, at 130 It was dried at ° C for 20 minutes to prepare a film 29. 21. Characteristics of Films 1 to 29 The characteristics of the above films 1 to 29 are summarized in the following table. In addition, Re(590) and Rth(590) of each film were prepared by measuring 30 mm x 40 mm at 25° (3, 60% RH for 2 hours, and at KOBRA 21ADH (manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments Co., Ltd.) at a wavelength of 590 nm). The measurement was performed on the assumption that the average refractive index of the films 1 to 6, 9, 1 and 18' 22, 23, and 26 to 29 was calculated as 1.48 and the film thickness, and the film other than the film was used as the average refractive index. Assuming 値, 1.52 for film 7 and 20, 1.60 for film 8, 1.50 for film 1 , 1.53 for film 21, 1.59 for film 24, and 1.58 for film 25. -83- 201118476 [Table 8] Film thickness (/zm) Re (590) (nm) Rth (590) (nm) Film 1 80 50 240 Film 2 80 60 250 Film 3 80 70 265 Film 4 85 55 200 Film 5 60 70 215 Film 6 60 50 120 Film 7 50 77 47 Film 8 68 1.5 207 Film 9 80 0.5 - 2.1 Film 10 30 0.8 1.5 Film 11 80 3 45 Film 12 57 15 10 Film 13 59 10 10 Film 14 62 10 30 Film 15 51 10 25 Film 16 57 15 25 Film 17 70 62 238 Film 18 58 67 223 Film 19 60 1.9 3,1 Film 20 50 1 1.8 3 film 21 38 1 60 250 film 22 70 60 250 film 23 45 75 160 film 24 80 140 72 film 25 85 4.5 178 film 26 85 60 250 film 27 86 60 250 film 28 79 61 230 film 29 41 0.5 45 22. Preparation of polarizing plate A polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) film having a thickness of 80/zm was immersed in an iodine solution of iodine at a temperature of 30 ° C for 60 seconds, followed by dyeing at a boric acid concentration of 4 masses. After immersing in a boric acid aqueous solution of a concentration of 60 seconds for a longitudinal extension of 5 times of the original length, it was dried at 50 ° C for 4 minutes - 84 to 2011 18476 minutes to obtain a polarizing film having a thickness of 20 μm. Among the films 1 to 29 shown below, the fluorinated cellulose-based film was subjected to saponification treatment as follows. After immersing each film in a 1.5 mol/liter and 55 ° C aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, water was sufficiently used. Rinse the sodium hydroxide. Then, after immersing in an aqueous solution of 0.005 mTorr/liter and 35 °C in a dilute sulfuric acid aqueous solution for 1 minute, it was immersed in water and the dilute sulfuric acid aqueous solution was sufficiently washed. Finally, the sample was sufficiently dried at 120 °C. The polarizing film was sandwiched between any two of the films 1 to 29 to form a bonded polarizing plate. The combination is shown in the following table. Further, the films 1 to 9, 11 to 18, and 22 to 29 of the deuterated cellulose-based film are bonded together using a polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesive; and the film 10 is bonded to a photo-adhesive layer by an easy-adhesion layer. The surface side; and the film 19 to 2 1 are bonded by an acrylic adhesive. Further, the films 1 to 24 and 26 to 28 are such that the in-plane retardation axis and the transmission axis of the polarizer are aligned in parallel; and the films 25 and 29 are in-plane retardation axes and polarizers. The through axes are orthogonal to each other. 23. Preparation of VA type liquid crystal display device (1) Preparation of liquid crystal cell 1 LC-42RX1W (manufactured by SHARP Co., Ltd.) was prepared as a VA type liquid crystal display cell. It is used as the liquid crystal cell 1. The AXOSCAN manufactured by AXOMETRICS Co., Ltd. and the attached software were used to measure the Δη£ι of the liquid crystal cell 1 (At the time of 59〇1, And(590) was 300 nm. (2) Preparation of the liquid crystal cell 2 (2) -1 Red pixel portion form

[S -85- 201118476 <硬化性組成物層(塗膜)的形成> 藉由使用具有狹縫間隔 100^ m、塗布有效寬度 500mm的狹縫頭之狹縫塗布裝置,將特開2009-144126 號公報的實施例17的著色感光性組成物更使用0.05mm 0氧化锆珠粒之珠粒分散機超頂點軋輥機(壽工業公司製) 進行30分鐘分散處理者,狹縫塗布於在一側面上黑底(BM) 形成之玻璃基板(550mmx650mm)的BM形成面側,以形 成硬化性組成物層(塗膜)。 狹縫塗布係調節狹縫與玻璃基板之間隔、塗布液的吐 出量,以使得後烘烤後的膜厚爲2.0/zm,並以塗布速度 100mm /秒來進行。 <曝光 '顯像、洗淨(漂洗}> 接著,使用加熱板,在80°C對於所得之硬化性組成物 層進行120秒鐘乾燥(預烘烤)之後,使用HITACHI曝光機 LE5565,以鄰接縫隙爲180以m、在90mJ/cm2下使其曝 光(照度:20mW/cm2)。 將曝光後的基板在氫氧化鉀系顯像液CDK-1(富士軟 片電子材料(股)製)的1.0%顯像液(25°C)中淋浴顯像60秒 鐘,並用純水使其洗淨。 根據以上,在玻璃基板上形成紅色畫素部。將該基板 在烘箱進行220°C 30分鐘的後烘烤,以得到紅色畫素部形 成之玻璃基板》 (2)-2綠色畫素部的形成 在紅色畫素部形成之玻璃基板上,除了使用將特開 -86- 201118476 2009-144126號公報的實施例18的著色感光性組成物更 使用 0.05mmc/»氧化錐珠粒之珠粒分散機超頂點軋輥機 (壽工業公司製)進行30分鐘分散處理者以外,與紅色畫素 部的形成同樣地形成綠色畫素部。將該基板在烘箱220°C 下進行30分鐘的後烘烤’以得到紅色畫素部及綠色畫素部 形成之玻璃基板。 (2)-3藍色畫素部的形成 在紅色畫素部及綠色畫素部形成之玻璃基板上,除了 使用將特開2009-144126號公報的實施例19之著色感光 性組成物更使用〇.〇5mm0氧化锆珠粒之珠粒分散機超頂 點軋輥機(壽工業公司製)進行30分鐘分散處理者以外’與 紅色畫素部的形成同樣地形成藍色畫素部。將該基板在烘 箱230X:下進行30分鐘的後烘烤,以得到彩色濾光片基 板。 藉由在上述製作之彩色濾光片基板上,噴濺 ITO(Indium Tin Oxide,氧化銦錫)的透明電極而形成。 接著,按照特開2006-64921號公報的實施·例1,在相當 於該ITO膜上的隔壁(黑底)上部之部分形成間隔物。將其 作爲前側基板。 別外,準備形成ITO的透明電極之玻璃基板作爲對向 基板,分別對於彩色濾光片基板及對向基板的透明電極實 施PVA模式用圖案化,更於其上設置由垂直聚醯亞胺所構 成之配向膜。 分解從SHARP公司製的液晶面板「LC-37GX1W」所 [S] -87- 201118476 取出之液晶胞,取出配置於光源側之陣列基板,用乙醇洗 淨表面之後,使用玻璃用配合油貼合前述製品陣列基板於 前述對向基板的玻璃側。將其作爲後側基板。 然後,在相當於如圍繞前側基板的彩色濾光片之RGB 畫素群的周圍所設置的黑底外框之位置,利用分配器方式 塗布紫外線硬化樹脂的密封劑,滴下VA模式用液晶,且 與後側基板貼合之後,UV照射貼合之基板後,進行熱處理 使密封劑硬化》像這樣地製作液晶胞2。 繼而,使用AXOMETRICS公司製的AXOSCAN與附 屬的軟體測定所製作之液晶胞2的And (590)時,And(590) 爲 3 Ο Ο n m。 (3) 液晶胞3的製作法 在彩色濾光片基板的製作法中,除了分別在紅色畫素 部的形成中使用特開2009-144126號公報的實施例17的 著色感光性組成物、在綠色畫素部的形成中使用特開 2009-144126號公報的實施例18的著色感光性組成物、 在藍色畫素部的形成中使用特開2009-144126號公報的 實施例1 9之著色感光性組成物以外,以與液晶胞2同樣 的方法製作液晶胞3。 繼而,使用AXOMETRICS公司製的AXOSCAN與附 屬的軟體測定所製作之液晶胞3的And (590)時,And(590) 爲 3 0 0 n m 〇 (4) 液晶胞4的製作法 除了在相當於彩色濾光片基板上的ITO膜上的隔壁上 -88- 201118476 部之部分所形成的柱上間隔物圖案’使用直徑16#m、平 均高度3.O/zm的者以外,以與液晶胞2同樣的方法製作 液晶胞4。 使用AXOMETRICS公司製的AXOSCAN與附屬的軟 體測定所製作之液晶胞4的Δη€ΐ(590)時,Δη{1(590)爲 2 4 Ο n m。 (5) 液晶胞5的製作法 準備形成ITO的透明電極之玻璃基板’在玻璃基板上 的ITO膜上,形成直徑16jwm、平均高度3.7#m的透明 柱狀間隔物圖案,且在透明電極施加PVA模式用圖案化, 更於其上設置由垂直聚醯亞胺所構成之配向膜以作爲正面 基板。 以與液晶胞2同樣的方法製作後側基板。 然後,在前側基板的柱上間隔物上,利用分配器方式 塗布紫外線硬化樹脂的密封劑,滴下VA模式用液晶,與 後側基板貼合後,UV照射經貼合的基板之後,進行熱處理 使密封劑硬化。像這樣地製作液晶胞5。 繼而,使用AXOMETRICS公司製的AXOSCAN與附 屬的軟體測定所製作之液晶胞5的Δη€ΐ(590)時,Δη€ΐ(590) 爲 3 Ο Ο n m。 (6) 液晶胞6(參考例用)的製作法 在彩色濾光片基板的製作法中,除了分別在紅色畫素 部的形成中使用特開2009-144126號公報之比較例12的 著色感光性組成物、在綠色畫素部的形成中使用特開 -89- 201118476 2GG9· 144 126號公報之比較例13之著色感光性組成物、 在藍色畫素部的形成中使用特開2009-144126號公報之 比較例1 4的著色感光性組成物‘以外,以與液晶胞2同樣 的方法製作液晶胞6。 (7)所製作液晶胞之前側基板及後側基板的構件對比 的算出 分解液晶胞 1,將配置於視認側之基板作爲前側基 板、配置於光源側之陣列基板作爲後側基板,用乙醇洗淨 表面後,使用於前側基板及後側基板的構件CR的算出。 在SHARP公司製的液晶面板「LC-32GH5」的背光 上,配置偏光板(HLC2-2518、SANRITZ公司製),於其上, 安裝前述的液晶胞1~5的前側基板、或後側基板於旋轉台 (SGSP- 12 0YAW、SIGMA光機製}上,且以2mm間隔與光 源上的偏光板成平行而配置。此時,使在後側基板之陣列 的配線及正面基板的黑底,與偏光板的偏光軸成一致而配 置。更於其上,配置安裝有旋轉台之偏光板(HLC2-2518、 SANRITZ公司製)以使得偏光板間的距離爲52mm,使用 測定器(BM5A、TOPCON公司製),在暗室中測定法線方向 的黑顯示及白顯示的亮度値,以算出正面對比A(白亮度/ 黑亮度)。此處,使偏光板回轉時、亮度値變得最低時作爲 黑顯示的亮度値,以及在使偏光板回轉90度之情形的亮度 値作爲白顯示的亮度値》 接著,在前述之形態中,以卸下彩色濾光片基板或陣 列基板之形態,此定僅有偏光板的黑顯示及白顯示之亮度 -90- .201118476 値,並算出正面對比B。 爲了排除在正面對比Α中偏光板的正面對比Β的影 響,用下式算出構件對比。 構件對比=1 / (1 /正面對比A- 1 /正面對比Β) 基於所算出之構件對比,算出前側基板的構件對比/ 後側基板的構件對比,並彙整於下表中。 [表9] 液晶胞的 種類 And(590) (nm) 前側基板的構件對比/後側基板的 構件對比 液晶胞1 300 3.1 液晶胞2 300 3.5 液晶胞3 300 3.0 液晶胞4 240 3.5 液晶胞5 300 114 液晶胞6 (參考例用) 300 1.7 (7) VA型液晶顯示裝置的製作 用下述表所示之組合,貼合偏光板於上述液晶胞項中 任一項之兩基板的外側表面,以製作VA型液晶顯示裝置。 偏光板的吸收軸係互相成正交而貼合。 作爲所製作之各液晶顯示裝置的光源,在液晶胞1~4 及6中係使用LC-42RX1W(SHARP(股)公司製)的背光,在 液晶胞5中係使用以180Hz交互發光BGR3色的LED者, 並進行以下的評價。 24.VA型液晶顯示裝置的評儐 使用上述液晶胞1作爲VA型液晶胞,如下述表所示 般分別與偏光板組合,以分別製作實施例及比較例的液晶 -91- 201118476 顯示裝置。 (1) 正面對比的測定 使用測定器(BM5A、TOPCON公司製),在暗室中,測 定面板法線方向的黑顯示及白顯示的亮度値,並算出正面 對比(白亮度/黑亮度)。 (2) 正面對比度的測定 使用測定器(BM5A、TOPCON公司製),在暗室中’測 定面板法線方向的黑顯示及白顯示的亮度値,並算出正面 對比{白亮度/黑亮度)。此時,測定器與面板間的距離設定 爲 7 0 0 m m。 繼而,正面對比度係基於在基準形態的正面對比度, 並以下式而算出。 正面鄴比度=在實施形態的正面對比/在基準形態的正 面對比 另外,基準形態係在液晶胞1的情形爲比較例1 〇且 正面對比爲3060。 (3) 視野角對比(斜向方向的對比) 測定從裝置正面的在方位角方向45度、極角方向60 度的黑顯示時的光漏率。該値越小,則在斜向45度方向的 光漏越少,表示顯示裝置的對比良好,可評價液晶顯示裝 置的視野角特性。 在下述指標的不容許係意味著即使在明室,光漏也可 以被認識程度的光漏。 ◎:光漏不能被認識 -92- .201118476 〇 :光漏爲輕度 △ ··光漏爲中重度 △ χ:很大的光漏(不容許) X :強烈的光漏(不容許) (4) 黑顯示時的色偏移 測定在極角60度的全方位角方向的變化(Auvj ^ 在下述指標的不容許係意味著即使在明室,也可以;^ 認識程度的色味變化。 ◎:色味變化爲非常小 〇:色味變化爲輕度的 △ ’·色味變化爲中程度的 △ x :有色味變化(不容許) x :有強烈的色味變化(不容許) (5) 角落不均 角落不均係使液晶顯示裝置在50 °C、95 % RH下,熱 處理120小時,且在25C、60%RH下調濕20小時後, 使背光點燈,以進行在黑顯示的光漏評價。 ◎ : 4個角落沒有光漏 〇:4個角落之中,無論何處均有隱約的光漏 △ ·’ 4個角落之中,在2~3個地方有光漏(不容許) △x:在4個角落有光漏(不容許) 在4個角落有清楚的光漏(不容許) 結果係表示於下述表中。 -93- 201118476 [表 ι〇] 液晶顯示 裝置 前側偏光板 後側偏光板 正面 對比 正 面 對 比 度 % 視 野 角 對 比 色 偏 移 角 落 不 均 保護薄 膜外側 保護薄 膜内側 *1 保護薄 膜内側 *1 保護薄 膜外側 實施例1 薄膜11 薄膜1 薄膜9 薄膜11 3182 104 〇 〇 〇 實施例2 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜9 薄膜11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例3 薄膜11 薄膜3 薄膜9 薄膜11 3196 104 〇 〇 〇 實施例4 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜9 薄膜9 3256 106 ◎ ◎ ◎ 實施例5 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜10 薄膜11 3245 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例6 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜10 薄膜10 3241 106 ◎ ◎ ◎ 實施例7 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜19 薄膜11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例8 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜20 薄膜11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例9 薄膜11 薄膜22 薄膜9 薄膜11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例10 薄膜11 薄膜21 薄膜9 薄膜11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例11 薄膜11 薄膜17 薄膜13 薄膜11 3170 104 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例12 薄膜11 薄膜18 薄膜15 薄膜11 3100 101 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例13 薄膜11 薄膜26 薄膜9 薄膜11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例141 薄膜11 薄膜27 薄膜9 薄膜11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例$ 薄膜29 薄膜27 薄膜9 薄膜29 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例161 薄膜11 薄膜27 薄膜9 薄膜29 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例17 薄膜29 薄膜27 薄膜9 薄膜11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 實施例18 薄膜11 薄膜28 薄膜9 薄膜11 3250 106 Δ Δ 〇 * 1 在實施例中,後側偏光板的内側保護薄膜係相當於 第1相位差薄膜,且前側偏光板的内側保護薄膜係相當於第2 相位差薄膜。 -94- .201118476 [表 1 l] 液晶顯不 裝置 前側偏光板 後側偏光板 正面對 比 正面 對比 度% 視 野 角 對 比 色 偏 移 角 落 不 均 保護薄 膜外側 保護薄 膜内側 *1 保護薄膜 内側U 保護薄膜 外側 比較例1 卜薄膜11 ^膜9 薄膜2_ 薄膜11 2824 92 ◎ ◎ X 比較例2 薄膜11 薄膜8 薄膜7 薄膜η 2832 93 ◎ 〇 X 比較例3 *膜11 薄膜4 薄膜11 薄膜11 3058 100 ◎ ◎ Δ 比較例4 薄膜11 薄膜11 薄膜4 薄膜11 2875 94 ◎ ◎ Δ X 比較例5 薄膜11 薄膜6 薄膜6 薄膜11 2983 97 ◎ ◎ Δ X 比較例6 薄膜11 薄膜10 薄膜2 薄膜11 2801 92 ◎ ◎ X 比較例7 薄膜11 薄膜24 薄膜25 薄膜11 2750 90 ◎ 〇 X 比較例8 薄膜11 薄膜17 薄膜12 薄膜11 3065 100 ◎ ◎ Δ 比較例9 薄膜11 薄膜18 薄膜14 薄膜11 3065 100 ◎ ◎ Δ 比較例 10 薄膜11 薄膜18 薄膜16 薄膜11 3060 100 ◎ ◎ Δ *1 在實施例中,後側偏光板的内側保護薄膜係相當於 第1相位差薄膜’且前側偏光板的内側保護薄膜係相當於第2 相位差薄膜。 由上述結果,可理解具有後側偏光板的内側保護薄 膜、亦即作爲第1相位差薄膜、滿足|Re(590}| ^ 10nm 及 |Rth(590}| $ 25nm 之薄膜 9、10、13、15.19 及 20 中任一者之本發明的實施例之VA型液晶顯示裝置,係無 論哪一個均正面對比很高。再者,可理解無論是在視野角 對比、黑顯示時的色偏移、及角落不均的任一觀點均爲良 好的。 另一方面,使用薄膜7作爲後側偏光板的内側保護薄 膜之比較例2雖然在薄膜7中,含有滿足作爲第1相位差 -95- 201118476 薄膜所要求之特性的薄膜,但是除此之外,由於也存在不 滿足該特性之相位差薄膜(相位差薄膜7a),所以正面對比 降低係爲可理解的。 另外,除了比較例1及比較例6分別取代實施例2及 5的後側偏光板與前側偏光板以外,爲相同的構成,但由 於在後側偏光子與液晶胞之間存在有不滿足對第1相位差 薄膜所要求之特性的薄膜2,所以正面對比降低係爲可理 解的。 實施例1 8雖然正面對比與實施例1同樣很髙,但是 視野角對比與實施例1比較爲較低的。其係一般認爲是由 於雖然作爲第2相位差薄膜所利用之薄膜28的光學特性 滿足了 And(590)-70nm ^ Rth ι (5 9 0) + R t h 2 ( 5 9 0) ^ △ nd(590)-10nm,但是幾乎爲下限値》 2 5. VA型液晶顯示裝置的評價(液晶胞的特性) 接著,在實施例2的液晶顯示裝置的製作中,除了取 代液晶胞1而改使用液晶胞2 ~ 5以外,與實施例2同樣地 製作VA型液晶顯示裝置,並與上述同樣地進行評價。評 價結果係表示於下述表中。 但是,關於從下式所算出之正面對比度,基準形態係 如下所示。 正面對比度=在實施形態的正面對比/在基準形態的正 面對比 液晶胞1的情形爲比較例1 〇且正面對比爲3 0 6 0、 液晶胞2的情形爲比較例1 1且正面對比爲3080、 -96- •201118476 液晶胞3的情形爲比較例1 2且正面對比爲2 8 2 0、 液晶胞4的情形爲比較例13且正面對比爲2480、及 液晶胞5的情形爲比較例14且正面對比爲3950。 [表 12] 液晶顯示 裝置 前側偏光板 後側偏光板 液 晶 胞 正面 對比 正面 對比 度 % 保護薄 膜外側 保護薄 膜内側 *1 保護薄 膜内側 *1 保護薄 膜外側 實施例2 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜9 薄膜11 1 3258 106 實施例19 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜9 薄膜11 2 3285 107 實施例20 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜9 薄膜11 3 2900 103 實施例21 薄膜11 薄膜5 薄膜9 薄膜11 4 2640 106 實施例22 薄膜11 薄膜2 薄膜9 薄膜11 5 4330 110 比較例11 薄膜11 薄膜5 薄膜11 薄膜11 2 3080 100 比較例12 薄膜11 薄膜5 薄膜11 薄膜11 3. 2820 100 比較例13 薄膜11 薄膜23 薄膜11 薄膜11 4 2480 100 比較例14 薄膜11 薄膜5 薄膜11 薄膜11 5 3950 100 當當 相相 係係 膜膜 薄薄 護護 保保 側彻 内内 的的 板板 光光 偏偏 側側 後前 ,且 中,。 例膜膜 施薄薄 實差差 在位位 相相 *11 2 第第 於於 由上述表所示之結果,可理即使關於解液晶胞基板的 前側基板的構件對比/後側基板的構件對比爲3.0以上的 液晶胞1~5的哪一者,正面對比度均顯著地改善了。在實 施例22所利用之液晶胞5與饋送順序驅動的液晶胞同樣 的,亦即由上述結果,可理解本發明的效果即使在饋送順 序驅動的液晶顯不裝置中亦爲顯著的。 除了取代液晶胞1而使用液晶胞6作爲參考例以外, 亦對於與實施例2同樣地製作之VA型液晶顯示裝置進行 同樣地評價。在該VA型液晶顯示裝置,不太能得到正面 -97- 201118476 對比度的改善效果,與實施例2、實施例19~22比較’正 面對比度較小。該理由係推測是因爲液晶胞6的前側基板 之構件對比/後側基板之構件對比爲1 · 7,所以減輕了本發 明的效果。 【圖式簡單說明】 圖1係本發明的VA型液晶顯示裝置之一例的剖面模 式圖。 圖2係說明本發明的作用所使用的模式圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 圖中符號的意思係如下所述。 10 背光 12、14 偏光子 16 第1相位差薄膜(第1相位差領域) 18 第2相位差薄膜(第2相位差領域) 20、22 外側保護薄膜 24 基板 LC VA型液晶胞 PL1 後側偏光板 PL2 前側偏光板 -98-[S-85-201118476 <Formation of Curable Composition Layer (Coating Film)> By using a slit coating device having a slit slit of 100 μm and a coating effective width of 500 mm, the special opening 2009 In the case of the coloring photosensitive composition of the ninth embodiment, the coloring photosensitive composition of the ninth oxidized zirconia bead was further used for 30 minutes, and the slit was applied to the bead dispersion machine (manufactured by Shou Industrial Co., Ltd.). The BM forming surface side of the glass substrate (550 mm x 650 mm) formed by the black matrix (BM) on one side surface is formed to form a curable composition layer (coating film). The slit coating was used to adjust the interval between the slit and the glass substrate and the discharge amount of the coating liquid so that the film thickness after post-baking was 2.0 / zm, and the coating speed was 100 mm / sec. <Exposure' development, washing (rinsing}> Next, using a hot plate, drying the obtained curable composition layer at 80 ° C for 120 seconds (prebaking), using HITACHI exposure machine LE5565, Exposure to an adjacent gap of 180 m and 90 mJ/cm 2 (illuminance: 20 mW/cm 2 ). The exposed substrate was made up of potassium hydroxide-based developing solution CDK-1 (Fuji Film Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) In a 1.0% developing solution (25 ° C), the shower was developed for 60 seconds, and washed with pure water. According to the above, a red pixel portion was formed on the glass substrate. The substrate was subjected to an oven at 220 ° C. After the minute baking, to obtain the glass substrate formed by the red pixel part. (2)-2 The green pixel part is formed on the glass substrate formed by the red pixel part, except for the use of the special opening-86-201118476 2009- The coloring photosensitive composition of Example 18 of the publication No. 144126 was further subjected to a dispersion treatment for 30 minutes using a bead separator of a 0.05 mmc/» oxidized cone bead (manufactured by Shou Industrial Co., Ltd.), and a red pixel. The formation of the portion also forms a green pixel portion. The substrate is in the oven 220. After 30 minutes of post-baking at C, a glass substrate formed by a red pixel portion and a green pixel portion is obtained. (2) The formation of the blue pixel portion is formed in the red pixel portion and the green pixel portion. On the glass substrate, a colored photosensitive composition of Example 19 of JP-A-2009-144126 was used, and a bead disperser (manufactured by Shou Industrial Co., Ltd.) was used. A blue pixel portion was formed in the same manner as the formation of the red pixel portion except for the 30 minute dispersion processor. The substrate was post-baked in an oven 230X for 30 minutes to obtain a color filter substrate. The OLED film is formed by sputtering a transparent electrode of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) on the color filter substrate produced as described above. A spacer is formed on the upper portion of the upper partition (black matrix) as a front substrate. In addition, a glass substrate on which a transparent electrode for forming ITO is prepared is used as a counter substrate, and is transparent to the color filter substrate and the opposite substrate, respectively. electrode The patterning of the PVA mode is carried out, and an alignment film made of a vertical polyimine is further provided. The liquid crystal cell taken out from the liquid crystal panel "LC-37GX1W" manufactured by SHARP Co., Ltd. [S] -87- 201118476 is decomposed. The array substrate disposed on the light source side is taken out, and the surface is washed with ethanol, and then the product array substrate is bonded to the glass side of the opposite substrate using a glass oil. This is used as a rear substrate. The position of the black matrix outer frame provided around the RGB pixel group of the color filter of the front substrate is applied to the sealant of the ultraviolet curable resin by a dispenser method, and the liquid crystal for VA mode is dropped, and after bonding to the rear substrate After the UV-irradiated substrate is bonded, heat treatment is performed to cure the sealant, and the liquid crystal cell 2 is produced in this manner. Then, when A(OS) of the liquid crystal cell 2 produced by the AXOSTRI manufactured by AXOMETRICS Co., Ltd. and the attached software was measured, And(590) was 3 Ο Ο n m. (3) Method for producing liquid crystal cell 3 In the method of producing a color filter substrate, in addition to the formation of the red pixel portion, the coloring photosensitive composition of Example 17 of JP-A-2009-144126 is used. In the formation of the green pixel portion, the colored photosensitive composition of Example 18 of JP-A-2009-144126, and the coloring of Example 19 of JP-A-2009-144126 are used for the formation of the blue pixel portion. The liquid crystal cell 3 was produced in the same manner as the liquid crystal cell 2 except for the photosensitive composition. Then, using the AXOSCAN manufactured by AXOMETRICS Co., Ltd. and the attached software to measure the And (590) of the liquid crystal cell 3, And(590) is 300 nm. (4) The method of producing the liquid crystal cell 4 is in addition to the color. The on-column spacer pattern formed on the partition wall of the ITO film on the ITO film on the -88-201118476 portion uses a diameter of 16#m and an average height of 3.O/zm, and the liquid crystal cell 2 The same method is used to fabricate the liquid crystal cell 4. When AXOSCAN manufactured by AXOMETRICS Co., Ltd. and Δηΐ (590) of the liquid crystal cell 4 produced by the attached software measurement were used, Δη{1(590) was 2 4 Ο n m. (5) Method for Producing Liquid Crystal Cell 5 A glass substrate of a transparent electrode forming ITO is prepared to form a transparent columnar spacer pattern having a diameter of 16 jwm and an average height of 3.7 #m on an ITO film on a glass substrate, and is applied on a transparent electrode. The PVA mode is patterned, and an alignment film composed of a vertical polyimide is further provided as a front substrate. The rear substrate was produced in the same manner as the liquid crystal cell 2. Then, the sealant of the ultraviolet curable resin is applied to the spacer on the pillar of the front substrate, the liquid crystal for VA mode is dropped, and after bonding to the rear substrate, the bonded substrate is UV-irradiated, and then heat-treated. The sealant hardens. The liquid crystal cell 5 is produced in this manner. Then, when AXOSCAN manufactured by AXOMETRICS Co., Ltd. and the attached software were used to measure Δηΐ ΐ (590) of the liquid crystal cell 5 produced by the method, Δη€ΐ(590) was 3 Ο Ο n m. (6) Method for producing liquid crystal cell 6 (for reference example) In the method of producing a color filter substrate, the coloring sensitivity of Comparative Example 12 of JP-A-2009-144126 is used for the formation of the red pixel portion. For the formation of the green component, the coloring photosensitive composition of Comparative Example 13 of JP-A-89-201118476, 2GG9, 144, 126, and the formation of the blue pixel portion are used in the formation of the blue pixel portion. The liquid crystal cell 6 was produced in the same manner as the liquid crystal cell 2 except for the coloring photosensitive composition of Comparative Example 1 of 144126. (7) The liquid crystal cell 1 is calculated by comparing the components of the liquid crystal cell front side substrate and the rear side substrate, and the substrate disposed on the viewing side is used as the front substrate, and the array substrate disposed on the light source side is used as the rear substrate, and washed with ethanol. After the net surface, the calculation of the member CR used for the front substrate and the rear substrate is performed. A polarizing plate (HLC2-2518, manufactured by SANRITZ Co., Ltd.) is disposed on the backlight of the liquid crystal panel "LC-32GH5" manufactured by SHARP, and the front substrate or the rear substrate of the liquid crystal cells 1 to 5 described above is mounted thereon. The rotating table (SGSP-12AHY, SIGMA optical mechanism) is placed in parallel with the polarizing plate on the light source at intervals of 2 mm. At this time, the wiring of the array of the rear substrate and the black matrix of the front substrate are polarized and polarized. The polarizing plates of the plates are arranged in a uniform manner. Further, a polarizing plate (HLC2-2518, manufactured by SANRITZ Co., Ltd.) equipped with a rotating table is disposed so that the distance between the polarizing plates is 52 mm, and a measuring device (BM5A, TOPCON) is used. In the dark room, the black display in the normal direction and the brightness 白 in the white display are measured to calculate the front contrast A (white brightness/black brightness). Here, when the polarizing plate is rotated and the brightness 値 is minimized, it is displayed as black. The brightness 値 and the brightness 情形 when the polarizing plate is rotated by 90 degrees 値 as the brightness of the white display 値 Next, in the above-described form, the color filter substrate or the array substrate is removed, which is only Polarizer Display and white display brightness -90- .201118476 値, and calculate the front contrast B. In order to eliminate the influence of the front side contrast 偏 of the polarizer in the front contrast ,, calculate the component contrast by the following formula. Component comparison = 1 / (1 / Front contrast A-1 / front contrast Β) Based on the calculated component comparison, the component contrast of the front side substrate/comparison of the back side substrate is calculated and summarized in the table below. [Table 9] Liquid crystal cell type And(590) (nm) Component comparison of the front side substrate / Component of the rear side substrate vs. liquid crystal cell 1 300 3.1 Liquid crystal cell 2 300 3.5 Liquid crystal cell 3 300 3.0 Liquid crystal cell 4 240 3.5 Liquid crystal cell 5 300 114 Liquid crystal cell 6 (for reference example) 300 1.7 (7) Manufacture of a VA liquid crystal display device A VA liquid crystal display device was fabricated by bonding a polarizing plate to the outer surface of two substrates of any one of the liquid crystal cells by a combination shown in the following table. In the liquid crystal cells 1 to 4 and 6, a backlight of LC-42RX1W (manufactured by SHARP Co., Ltd.) is used as the light source of each of the liquid crystal display devices to be produced, and the liquid crystal cell is used in the liquid crystal cell. 5 medium use to send at 180Hz The BGR3 color LED was evaluated as follows. 24. Evaluation of VA liquid crystal display device The liquid crystal cell 1 was used as a VA type liquid crystal cell, and was separately combined with a polarizing plate as shown in the following table to fabricate the examples. And the display device of the liquid crystal-91-201118476 of the comparative example. (1) Measurement of the front contrast The brightness of the black display and the white display in the normal direction of the panel was measured in a dark room using a measuring device (BM5A, TOPCON). Calculate the front contrast (white brightness / black brightness). (2) Measurement of front contrast Using the measuring device (BM5A, TOPCON), the black display in the normal direction of the panel and the brightness 白 in the white display were measured in the dark room, and the front contrast {white brightness/black brightness) was calculated. At this time, the distance between the measuring instrument and the panel is set to 700 mm. Then, the front contrast is calculated based on the front contrast in the reference form and is expressed by the following equation. Positive contrast ratio = positive contrast in the embodiment / positive facing ratio in the reference form. The reference form is the liquid crystal cell 1 in the case of the comparative example 1 and the front contrast is 3060. (3) Comparison of viewing angles (comparison of oblique directions) The light leakage rate at the time of black display from the front side of the apparatus at 45 degrees in the azimuth direction and 60 degrees in the polar angle direction was measured. The smaller the ridge is, the less the light leakage in the oblique direction of 45 degrees is, indicating that the contrast of the display device is good, and the viewing angle characteristic of the liquid crystal display device can be evaluated. The inadmissibility of the following indicators means that even in the bright room, the light leakage can be recognized by the light leakage. ◎: Light leakage cannot be recognized -92- .201118476 〇: Light leakage is mild △ ·· Light leakage is medium to heavy △ χ: Large light leakage (not allowed) X : Strong light leakage (not allowed) ( 4) The color shift at the time of black display is measured in the omnidirectional angular direction at a polar angle of 60 degrees (Auvj ^ is not allowed in the following indicators. It means that even in the bright room, it is possible to recognize the change in color odor. ◎: The change in color odor is very small 〇: The change in color odor is mild △ '· The change in color odor is moderate △ x : The change in color odor (not allowed) x : There is a strong change in color odor (not allowed) ( 5) The uneven corners of the corners are caused by heat treatment of the liquid crystal display device at 50 °C, 95% RH for 120 hours, and after 20 hours of humidity adjustment at 25C and 60% RH, the backlight is turned on for black display. Evaluation of light leakage ◎ : There are no light leaks in 4 corners: Among the 4 corners, there is a faint light leak everywhere △ · ' Among the 4 corners, there are light leaks in 2~3 places (not Allowed) △x: Light leakage in 4 corners (not allowed) Clear light leakage in 4 corners (not allowed) The result is indicated below -93- 201118476 [Table 〇] Liquid crystal display device front side polarizer rear side polarizer front side contrast contrast contrast % viewing angle contrast color offset corner unevenness protective film outer protective film inside *1 protective film inside *1 protective film Outer Embodiment 1 Film 11 Film 1 Film 9 Film 11 3182 104 〇〇〇 Example 2 Film 11 Film 2 Film 9 Film 11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ Example 3 Film 11 Film 3 Film 9 Film 11 3196 104 〇〇〇 Example 4 Film 11 Film 2 Film 9 Film 9 3256 106 ◎ ◎ Example 5 Film 11 Film 2 Film 10 Film 11 3245 106 ◎ ◎ Example 6 Film 11 Film 2 Film 10 Film 10 3241 106 ◎ ◎ ◎ Example 7 Film 11 Film 2 Film 19 Film 11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ Example 8 Film 11 Film 2 Film 20 Film 11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 Example 9 Film 11 Film 22 Film 9 Film 11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 Example 10 Film 11 Film 21 Film 9 Film 11 3240 106 ◎ ◎ Example 11 Film 11 Film 17 Film 13 Film 11 3170 104 ◎ ◎ 〇 Example 12 Film 11 Film 18 Film 15 Film 11 3100 101 ◎ ◎ Example 13 Film 11 Film 26 Film 9 Film 11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ Example 141 Film 11 Film 27 Film 9 Film 11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ 〇 EXAMPLES Film 29 Film 27 Film 9 Film 29 3258 106 ◎ ◎ Example 161 Film 11 Film 27 Film 9 Film 29 3258 106 ◎ ◎ Example 17 Film 29 Film 27 Film 9 Film 11 3258 106 ◎ ◎ Example 18 film 11 film 28 film 9 film 11 3250 106 Δ Δ 〇 * 1 In the embodiment, the inner protective film of the rear polarizer corresponds to the first retardation film, and the inner protective film of the front polarizer is equivalent to the first 2 retardation film. -94- .201118476 [Table 1 l] Liquid crystal display device Front side polarizer Rear side polarizer Front side contrast Contrast contrast % View angle Contrast color offset Corner unevenness Protective film outside protective film inside *1 Protective film inside U Protective film outside comparison Example 1 Film 11 Film 9 Film 2 Film 11 2824 92 ◎ ◎ X Comparative Example 2 Film 11 Film 8 Film 7 Film η 2832 93 ◎ 〇 X Comparative Example 3 * Film 11 Film 4 Film 11 Film 11 3058 100 ◎ ◎ Δ Comparative Example 4 Film 11 Film 11 Film 4 Film 11 2875 94 ◎ Δ Δ X Comparative Example 5 Film 11 Film 6 Film 6 Film 11 2983 97 ◎ ◎ Δ X Comparative Example 6 Film 11 Film 10 Film 2 Film 11 2801 92 ◎ ◎ X Comparative Example 7 Film 11 Film 24 Film 25 Film 11 2750 90 ◎ 〇 X Comparative Example 8 Film 11 Film 17 Film 12 Film 11 3065 100 ◎ Δ Δ Comparative Example 9 Film 11 Film 18 Film 14 Film 11 3065 100 ◎ ◎ Δ Comparative Example 10 Film 11 Film 18 Film 16 Film 11 3060 100 ◎ ◎ Δ *1 In the embodiment, the inner protective film of the rear polarizer is equivalent to the first retardation film. The film 'and the inner protective film of the front side polarizing plate correspond to the second retardation film. From the above results, it is understood that the inner protective film having the rear side polarizing plate, that is, the first retardation film, the film 9, 10, 13 satisfying |Re(590}| ^ 10 nm and |Rth(590}| $ 25 nm In any of the VA type liquid crystal display devices of the embodiments of the present invention according to any one of 15.19 and 20, the front view is highly contrasted. Further, it can be understood that the color shift is in contrast between the viewing angle and the black display. On the other hand, in Comparative Example 2 in which the film 7 was used as the inner protective film of the rear polarizing plate, the film 7 satisfies the first phase difference of -95- 201118476 Thin film of the characteristics required for the film, but in addition, since there is also a retardation film (phase difference film 7a) which does not satisfy the characteristic, the front contrast reduction is understandable. In addition, in addition to Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 6 has the same configuration except that the rear polarizing plates of Examples 2 and 5 and the front polarizing plate are the same, but there is a problem that the first retardation film is not satisfied between the rear side polarizer and the liquid crystal cell. Thin 2, so the front contrast reduction is understandable. Embodiment 1 Although the front contrast is as ambiguous as in Example 1, the viewing angle contrast is lower compared to Example 1. It is generally considered to be due to The optical characteristics of the film 28 used in the second retardation film satisfy And(590)-70 nm ^ Rth ι (5 9 0) + R th 2 ( 5 9 0) ^ Δ nd (590) - 10 nm, but almost Lower limit 値 2 2. Evaluation of VA liquid crystal display device (characteristic of liquid crystal cell) Next, in the production of the liquid crystal display device of the second embodiment, the liquid crystal cell 2 to 5 is used instead of the liquid crystal cell 1 In the same manner as described above, the VA liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as described above. The evaluation results are shown in the following table. However, the front contrast calculated from the following formula is as follows. = in the positive contrast of the embodiment / in the case of the front side of the reference form, the case of the liquid crystal cell 1 is Comparative Example 1 and the front side contrast is 3 0 60, the case of the liquid crystal cell 2 is the comparative example 1 1 and the front side contrast is 3080, - 96- •201118476 LCD cell 3 The case is Comparative Example 1 2 and the front contrast is 2 8 2 0, the case of the liquid crystal cell 4 is Comparative Example 13 and the front contrast is 2480, and the case of the liquid crystal cell 5 is Comparative Example 14 and the front contrast is 3950. [Table 12] Liquid crystal display device front side polarizing plate rear side polarizing plate liquid crystal cell front side contrast front contrast % protective film outer protective film inner side *1 protective film inner side *1 protective film outer side embodiment 2 film 11 film 2 film 9 film 11 1 3258 106 Example 19 Film 11 Film 2 Film 9 Film 11 2 3285 107 Example 20 Film 11 Film 2 Film 9 Film 11 3 2900 103 Example 21 Film 11 Film 5 Film 9 Film 11 4 2640 106 Example 22 Film 11 Film 2 Film 9 Film 11 5 4330 110 Comparative Example 11 Film 11 Film 5 Film 11 Film 11 2 3080 100 Comparative Example 12 Film 11 Film 5 Film 11 Film 11 3. 2820 100 Comparative Example 13 Film 11 Film 23 Film 11 Film 11 4 2480 100 Comparative Example 14 Film 11 Film 5 Film 11 Film 11 5 3950 100 When the phase film is thin and protective, the side of the plate is light and the side is behind. And in. The film film is thinned and thinned in the phase phase*11 2 . As shown in the above table, even if the component comparison/back substrate of the front substrate of the liquid crystal cell substrate is compared, In any of the liquid crystal cells 1 to 5 of 3.0 or more, the front contrast was remarkably improved. The liquid crystal cell 5 utilized in the embodiment 22 is the same as the liquid crystal cell driven in the feed order, i.e., from the above results, it is understood that the effects of the present invention are remarkable even in the liquid crystal display device which is driven in the order of driving. A liquid crystal cell 6 was used as a reference example instead of the liquid crystal cell 1, and the VA liquid crystal display device produced in the same manner as in the second embodiment was similarly evaluated. In the VA type liquid crystal display device, the contrast improvement effect of the front side -97 - 201118476 was not obtained, and the front surface contrast was small as compared with the second and the eleventh embodiments. This reason is presumed to be because the member contrast of the front side substrate of the liquid crystal cell 6 / the member of the rear side substrate is compared to 1.7, so that the effect of the present invention is alleviated. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a VA liquid crystal display device of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic view for explaining the action of the present invention. [Explanation of main component symbols] The meanings of the symbols in the figure are as follows. 10 Backlight 12, 14 Polarizer 16 First retardation film (first phase difference field) 18 Second retardation film (second phase difference field) 20, 22 Outer protective film 24 Substrate LC VA type liquid crystal cell PL1 Rear side polarized light Plate PL2 front side polarizer -98-

Claims (1)

201118476 七、申請專利範圍: 1. 一種VA型液晶顯示裝置,其特徵在於具有前側偏光子、 後側偏光子、於前述前側偏光子與後側偏光子之間所配置 的VA型液晶胞、及在前述後側偏光子與前述VA型液晶 胞之間由1層或2層以上的相位差層所構成之第1相位 差領域,該第1相位差領域滿足下述式: Ο n m ^ R e ( 5 9 0 ) ^ 10nm,且 |Rth(590)| ^ 2 5 n m 式中,Re(A)係意味著在波長ληιη的面内遲滯値(nm), Rth(A )係意味著在波長又nm的厚度方向的遲滯値(nm)。 2. 如申請專利範圍第1項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述VA型液晶胞係具有前側基板及後側基板,且前述前側 基板的構件對比(CRf)對前述後側基板的構件對比(CRr) 的比(CRf/CRr)爲3以上。 3 .如申請專利範圍第1項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中在 前述前側偏光子與前述VA型液晶胞之間具有由1層或2 層以上的相位差層所構成之第2相位差領域,該第2相位 差領域係滿足下述式: 3 Ο n m ^ R e (5 9 0 ) ^ 90nm,且 1 70nm ^ Rth (59 0) ^ 300nm 。 4 .如申請專利範圍第3項之V A型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述第1及前述第2相位差領域係滿足下述式: △ nd(590)-70 ^ R t h ι ( 5 9 0 ) + R t h 2 ( 5 9 0 ) ^ Δηά(590)- 10 式中,d係前述VA型液晶胞的液晶層的厚度(nm),Δη(入) 係前述VA型液晶胞的液晶層在波長λ的折射率異方向 -99- 201118476 性,Δηο!(λ}係意味著Δη(λ)與d的積;Rth“A)係意味 著在波長1的前述第1相位差領域之厚度方向的遲滯値 (nm)’及Rth2(A)係意味著在波長;I的前述第2相位差 領域之厚度方向的遲滯値(nm)。 5. 如申請專利範圍第1項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述第1相位差領域係由醯化纖維素系薄膜所構成、或含有 醯化纖維素系薄膜》 6. 如申請專利範圍第5項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述醯化纖維素系薄膜係在滿足下述式(I)及(II)的範圍內, 含有至少一種使厚度方向的遲滯値Rth降低的化合物, (I) (Rth[A]-Rth[0])/A ^ -1.0 (II) 0.01 ^ A ^ 30 (Rth[Ap含有 A%的使Rth降低之化合物的薄膜之 Rth (nm) ’ Rth [0]:不含有使Rth降低之化合物的薄膜之 Rth(nm),及A:薄膜原料聚合物的質量當作1〇〇時的化 合物的質量(%))。 7. 如申請專利範圍第5項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述醯化纖維素系薄膜係在醯基取代度爲2.85~3.00的醯 化纖維素中,相對於醯化纖維素固體含量而言含有 0.01~30質量%的至少1種使面内遲滯値Re及厚度方向 遲滯値Rth降低的化合物》 8. 如申請專利範圍第5項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述醯化纖維素系薄膜係相對於醯化纖維素固體含量而 言,含有 0.01~30質量。/。的至少 1種使薄膜的 -100- .201118476 |Re(400)-Re(700)丨及 |Rth(400)-Rth(700)丨降低的化合 物。 9. 如申請專利範圍第1項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述第1相位差領域係由丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜所構成、或含 有丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜。 10. 如申請專利範圍第9項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述第1相位差領域係由含有含至少1種從內酯環單位、馬 來酸酐單位、及戊二酸酐單位所選出之單位的丙烯酸系聚 合物之丙烯酸系聚合物薄膜所構成、或具有該丙烯酸系聚 合物薄膜。 1 1 .如申請專利範圍第3項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述第2相位差領域係由醯化纖維素系薄膜所構成、或含有 醯化纖維素系薄膜。 12. 如申請專利範圍第3項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中前 述第2相位差領域係由環狀烯烴系聚合物薄膜所構成、或 含有環狀烯烴系聚合物薄膜。 13. 如申請專利範圍第1項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其中正 面對比爲1 5 0 0以上。 1 4 .如申請專利範圍第1項之VA型液晶顯示裝置,其係含 有依序發光獨立之3原色光的背光單元,且以場序制驅動 方式而驅動的。 ί S1 -101 -201118476 VII. Patent application scope: 1. A VA type liquid crystal display device, comprising: a front side polarizer, a rear side polarizer, a VA type liquid crystal cell disposed between the front side polarizer and the rear side polarizer, and In the first phase difference region composed of one or two or more retardation layers between the rear side polarizer and the VA type liquid crystal cell, the first phase difference domain satisfies the following formula: Ο nm ^ R e ( 5 9 0 ) ^ 10 nm, and |Rth(590)| ^ 2 5 nm where Re(A) means the in-plane hysteresis nm(nm) at the wavelength ληιη, and Rth(A) means at the wavelength Further, the retardation 値 (nm) in the thickness direction of nm. 2. The VA type liquid crystal display device of claim 1, wherein the VA type liquid crystal cell has a front substrate and a rear substrate, and a component contrast (CRf) of the front substrate is compared with a component of the rear substrate ( The ratio (CRf/CRr) of CRr) is 3 or more. 3. The VA liquid crystal display device of claim 1, wherein the second phase difference region is composed of one or two or more retardation layers between the front side polarizer and the VA type liquid crystal cell. The second phase difference domain satisfies the following formula: 3 Ο nm ^ R e (5 9 0 ) ^ 90 nm, and 1 70 nm ^ Rth (59 0) ^ 300 nm . 4. The VA type liquid crystal display device of claim 3, wherein the first and second phase difference regions satisfy the following formula: Δ nd(590)-70 ^ R th ι ( 5 9 0 ) + R th 2 ( 5 9 0 ) ^ Δηά(590)-10 wherein d is the thickness (nm) of the liquid crystal layer of the VA type liquid crystal cell, and Δη (in) is the liquid crystal layer of the VA type liquid crystal cell at the wavelength λ The refractive index is different from -99 to 201118476, and Δηο! (λ} means the product of Δη(λ) and d; Rth "A) means the hysteresis in the thickness direction of the first phase difference region of wavelength 1値(nm)' and Rth2(A) mean a hysteresis nm (nm) in the thickness direction of the second phase difference region of the wavelength; I. 5. The VA type liquid crystal display device of claim 1 of the patent scope, The first phase difference field is composed of a deuterated cellulose-based film or a deuterated cellulose-based film. 6. The VA-type liquid crystal display device according to claim 5, wherein the deuterated cellulose system is The film system contains at least one compound which lowers the hysteresis 値Rth in the thickness direction within a range satisfying the following formulas (I) and (II). (I) (Rth[A]-Rth[0])/A ^ -1.0 (II) 0.01 ^ A ^ 30 (Rth [Ap contains R% (nm) of film of A compound with reduced Rth 'Rth [ 0]: Rth (nm) of a film which does not contain a compound which lowers Rth, and A: mass (%) of the compound when the mass of the film raw material polymer is regarded as 1 。. 7. In the VA type liquid crystal display device, the bismuth cellulose-based film is contained in the bismuth cellulose having a thiol substitution degree of 2.85 to 3.00, and is contained in an amount of 0.01 to 30% by mass based on the solid content of the bismuth cellulose. At least one compound which causes an in-plane retardation 値Re and a thickness direction retardation 値Rth. 8. The VA type liquid crystal display device according to claim 5, wherein the bismuth cellulose-based film is relative to bismuth cellulose. In terms of solid content, at least one of 0.01 to 30 mass% of the film reduces the -100-.201118476 |Re(400)-Re(700)丨 and |Rth(400)-Rth(700)丨 of the film. 9. The VA type liquid crystal display device of claim 1, wherein the first phase difference region is composed of an acrylic polymer film. Or a VA type liquid crystal display device according to claim 9, wherein the first phase difference field is composed of at least one selected from a lactone ring unit, a maleic anhydride unit, and The acrylic polymer film of the acrylic polymer of the unit selected from the glutaric anhydride unit or the acrylic polymer film. The VA type liquid crystal display device of claim 3, wherein the second phase difference field is composed of a deuterated cellulose film or a deuterated cellulose film. 12. The VA liquid crystal display device of claim 3, wherein the second phase difference region is composed of a cyclic olefin polymer film or a cyclic olefin polymer film. 13. The VA type liquid crystal display device of claim 1, wherein the positive facing ratio is 1 500 or more. A VA type liquid crystal display device as claimed in claim 1, which is a backlight unit including three primary color lights which are sequentially illuminated independently, and which are driven by a field sequential driving method. S S1 -101 -
TW098140800A 2009-11-30 2009-11-30 Va type liquid crystal display device TWI486688B (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW098140800A TWI486688B (en) 2009-11-30 2009-11-30 Va type liquid crystal display device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW098140800A TWI486688B (en) 2009-11-30 2009-11-30 Va type liquid crystal display device

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201118476A true TW201118476A (en) 2011-06-01
TWI486688B TWI486688B (en) 2015-06-01

Family

ID=44935677

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW098140800A TWI486688B (en) 2009-11-30 2009-11-30 Va type liquid crystal display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI486688B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI765011B (en) * 2017-03-28 2022-05-21 日商日本瑞翁股份有限公司 Phase difference plate, multilayer retardation plate, polarizing plate, image display device and polymerizable compound

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4143569B2 (en) * 2004-05-14 2008-09-03 キヤノン株式会社 Color display device
JP2007206661A (en) * 2005-04-25 2007-08-16 Nitto Denko Corp Liquid crystal panel and liquid crystal display device
JP5220616B2 (en) * 2006-12-05 2013-06-26 三井化学株式会社 Cyclic olefin polymer composition and use thereof
JP5028214B2 (en) * 2007-10-25 2012-09-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Composition, film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
JP5094500B2 (en) * 2008-03-28 2012-12-12 富士フイルム株式会社 Liquid crystal display

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI765011B (en) * 2017-03-28 2022-05-21 日商日本瑞翁股份有限公司 Phase difference plate, multilayer retardation plate, polarizing plate, image display device and polymerizable compound

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI486688B (en) 2015-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5529672B2 (en) Liquid crystal display
US8477273B2 (en) VA-mode liquid-crystal display device
JP5297360B2 (en) VA liquid crystal display device
CN102472920B (en) VA mode LCD
US8395727B2 (en) VA mode liquid crystal display device
JP2011133841A (en) Liquid crystal display device
JP5611575B2 (en) VA liquid crystal display device
JP2011095694A (en) Va-mode liquid crystal display device
JP5538853B2 (en) Liquid crystal display
TW201118476A (en) VA type liquid crystal display device
JP5202490B2 (en) VA liquid crystal display device
JP2011085885A (en) Va liquid crystal display device
WO2011064826A1 (en) Va-type liquid crystal display apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees